WO2022170830A1 - 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统 - Google Patents

一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022170830A1
WO2022170830A1 PCT/CN2021/135835 CN2021135835W WO2022170830A1 WO 2022170830 A1 WO2022170830 A1 WO 2022170830A1 CN 2021135835 W CN2021135835 W CN 2021135835W WO 2022170830 A1 WO2022170830 A1 WO 2022170830A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
time slot
code block
sub
slot resources
multiframe
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/135835
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
徐丽
钟其文
陈井凤
祁云磊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21925477.8A priority Critical patent/EP4283888A1/en
Publication of WO2022170830A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022170830A1/zh
Priority to US18/446,884 priority patent/US20230388984A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04J—MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
    • H04J3/00—Time-division multiplex systems
    • H04J3/16—Time-division multiplex systems in which the time allocation to individual channels within a transmission cycle is variable, e.g. to accommodate varying complexity of signals, to vary number of channels transmitted
    • H04J3/1605—Fixed allocated frame structures
    • H04J3/1652—Optical Transport Network [OTN]
    • H04J3/1658—Optical Transport Network [OTN] carrying packets or ATM cells
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
    • H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
    • H04L41/0896—Bandwidth or capacity management, i.e. automatically increasing or decreasing capacities
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04J—MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
    • H04J3/00—Time-division multiplex systems
    • H04J3/16—Time-division multiplex systems in which the time allocation to individual channels within a transmission cycle is variable, e.g. to accommodate varying complexity of signals, to vary number of channels transmitted
    • H04J3/1605—Fixed allocated frame structures
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04J—MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
    • H04J2203/00—Aspects of optical multiplex systems other than those covered by H04J14/05 and H04J14/07
    • H04J2203/0001—Provisions for broadband connections in integrated services digital network using frames of the Optical Transport Network [OTN] or using synchronous transfer mode [STM], e.g. SONET, SDH
    • H04J2203/0064—Admission Control
    • H04J2203/0067—Resource management and allocation
    • H04J2203/0069—Channel allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and in particular, to a communication method, device and chip system.
  • FlexE is a lightweight enhanced Ethernet technology that supports port binding, supports channelization technology, and can build end-to-end links.
  • Flexible Ethernet supports greater bandwidth through port binding, such as binding 8 100Gbps (bps is a unit of bit/s, can be abbreviated as bps) ports to achieve 800Gbps bandwidth; through channelization technology, it can realize flexible bandwidth allocation and support a variety of It is not necessary to be subject to the stepped rate system formulated by the IEEE 802.3 standard.
  • FlexE divides the 100Gbps interface into 20 time slots, each of which is 5Gbps, so FlexE can support N*5Gbps services through time slot allocation. Since the bandwidth allocated by FlexE must be based on 5 Gbps, FlexE has a bearing efficiency problem for services with non-5 Gbps granularity, including services less than 5 Gbps.
  • MTN based on FlexE technology, provides functions such as channel forwarding and operation and maintenance management (Operations, Administration, and Maintenance, OAM).
  • OAM Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
  • the corresponding time slot allocation is the same as that of FlexE, and the granularity is 5 Gbps, so there is also a problem of bearing efficiency, especially for small-granularity services, such as services with bandwidth requirements of 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps.
  • the Ethernet hard line technology is based on the MTN/FlexE technology and provides a smaller granularity of pipe bandwidth.
  • a channel with a granularity of 5 Gbps in a time slot of MTN/FlexE is called a large-granularity pipeline.
  • Small-granularity services are carried in large-granularity pipes, that is, small-granularity services occupy one 5Gbps.
  • the minimum bandwidth for small-granularity services is 10Mbps, and the 5Gbps large-granularity pipeline provides 480 small-granularity time slots to carry small-granularity services.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and chip system, which are used to adjust the bandwidth resources corresponding to a multiframe by adjusting the number of time slot resources included in the multiframe.
  • the present application provides a communication method, in which a first communication device sends a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe included in a second code block sequence.
  • the first communication device converts the Q1 first code block sequences into the Q1 first code block sequence.
  • the code block sequence is multiplexed to obtain a second code block sequence; Q1 is a positive integer.
  • the first communication device transmits the second sequence of code blocks.
  • the number of basic frames in a multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the number of time slot resources corresponding to the data carried in one multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the bandwidth corresponding to one multiframe can be adjusted, and then based on The adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the multiframe may further adjust the bandwidth of the service corresponding to the multiframe.
  • one of the first code block sequences in the Q1 first code block sequences may originate from the service of one customer, or may originate from the service of multiple customers.
  • a bandwidth corresponding to a time slot resource may be a preset value, for example, may be 5 Gbps or 10 Mbps, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a multiframe refers to a data segment in a data stream.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame.
  • a basic frame refers to a data segment in a data segment corresponding to a multi-frame.
  • the second code block sequence is obtained by multiplexing the first code block sequence according to the corresponding relationship between each time slot resource and the first code block sequence.
  • the data in one multiframe in the second code block sequence is derived from data corresponding to all time slot resources corresponding to the second code block sequence.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame. One basic frame is used to carry data of a client corresponding to at least one time slot resource.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, wherein a time slot resource corresponding to data in a basic frame is a part of time slot resources among all the time slot resources corresponding to a multiframe.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, a basic frame includes data of a client corresponding to a preset fixed number of time slot resources, and two basic frames in a multiframe, such as called For the first basic frame and the second basic frame, any one of all the time slot resources corresponding to the first basic frame is different from any one of all the time slot resources corresponding to the second basic frame.
  • One basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to K0 time slot resources.
  • the number of basic frames included in one multiframe is equal to the quotient of the total number of time slot resources S1 and K0.
  • the total number of timeslot resources corresponding to one multiframe corresponding to the bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from S2 to S1. Therefore, the number of basic frames included in one multiframe after bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from the quotient of S2 and K0 to the quotient of S1 and K0.
  • a basic frame sequentially includes: a header code block, K1 data code blocks and a tail code block.
  • the overhead information is carried on the first data code block after the header code block.
  • K1 is a positive integer.
  • the first communication device before the first communication device sends the first request message, it further includes that the first communication device receives a bandwidth adjustment message, and the bandwidth adjustment message may be sent by other devices, for example, it may be used for Unified management of the network management device.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is used to instruct to adjust the bandwidth corresponding to the client(s) among the Q1 clients, such as increasing the bandwidth or decreasing the bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is also used to indicate the adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients.
  • the first communication device determines, according to the bandwidth adjustment message, that the bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients needs to be adjusted, and sends a first request message.
  • the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe, or it may be to adjust the number of time slot resources included in a multiframe.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be larger, it means that more time slot resources can be used by clients.
  • the number of time slot resources included in the multiframe can also be changed In order to carry the data corresponding to the increased time slot resources, the number of basic frames included in the multiframe can be increased.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be smaller, it means that the number of timeslot resources used by clients is reduced.
  • the number of timeslot resources included in the multiframe can also be reduced. , and then the number of basic frames included in the multiframe is reduced, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing the time slot resources included in one multiframe.
  • the multiframes in the second code block sequence include the first number The basic frame of , the first quantity is greater than the quantity threshold, and the quantity threshold is related to the quantity of time slot resources divided into one time slot and the quantity of time slot resources corresponding to the data included in one basic frame. Since the number of basic frames included in one multiframe is greater than the number threshold, more bandwidth can be allocated to the client.
  • multiplexing the Q1 first code block sequences corresponding to the Q1 clients, and before obtaining the second code block sequence further comprising: combining the Q1
  • the corresponding relationship between the number of clients and the S2 time slot resources is adjusted as: the corresponding relationship between the Q1 customers and the S1 time slot resources; wherein, the S2 time slot resources are the basic frames in the multiframe before the adjustment in the second code block sequence Corresponding time slot resource; S2 is a positive integer.
  • the first time slot resource in S2 is the same or different from the second time slot resource in S1.
  • the first request message can be used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • a new signaling that is, a second request message, may be defined, and a second request message may be sent, where the second request message is used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • the second request message is sent after the first request message.
  • the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be increased first, and then the corresponding relationship between the corresponding clients and time slot resources on the adjusted multiframe can be adjusted.
  • the second request message is sent before the first request message.
  • the service corresponding to the time slot resource to be deleted in the multiframe can be migrated to the reserved time slot resource first, and then the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be reduced, thereby preventing service damage.
  • the second request message further includes: indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • the adjustment strategy includes: establishing a correspondence between the customers in the Q1 customers and the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources according to the first preset rule. In this way, all the clients and all the corresponding time slot resources in the adjusted multiframe can be rearranged, so that the clients can be more evenly distributed on the time slot resources.
  • the adjustment policy includes: when the first request message is used for requesting to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence: establishing a to-be-deleted rule according to a second preset rule The corresponding relationship between the client corresponding to the occupied time slot resource in the time slot resource and the idle time slot resource in the time slot resource to be reserved; wherein, the time slot resource in the time slot resource to be deleted satisfies the condition: the time slot resource is complex before adjustment The time slot resource corresponding to the frame, and the time slot resource is not the time slot resource corresponding to the adjusted multiframe; the time slot resource in the time slot resource to be reserved satisfies the conditions: the time slot resource is the time slot resource corresponding to the multiframe before the adjustment, and is the time slot resource corresponding to the adjusted multiframe. Since only the clients on the timeslot resources that need to be deleted are adjusted, the number of timeslot resources that need to adjust the corresponding relationship with the clients can be reduced.
  • establishing the correspondence between the clients corresponding to the occupied time slot resources in the time slot resources to be deleted and the idle time slot resources in the time slot resources to be reserved according to the second preset rule includes: setting a first A pointer and a second pointer, the first pointer is used to search for idle time slot resources from the time slot resources to be reserved according to the sorting of the time slot resources, and the second pointer is used to search for the time slot resources to be deleted according to the sorting of the time slot resources. Occupied time slot resources; associate clients corresponding to the occupied time slot resources sequentially found by the second pointer to the free time slot resources found by the first pointer according to the order of the free time slot resources found by the first pointer. In this way, the migration of services on the time slot resources can be completed relatively quickly, and services can be prevented from being missed.
  • the first request message further includes: indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device does not need to determine the maximum index number of the time slot resource according to the information issued by the network management device; The maximum index number of the slot resource is compared, so as to achieve the effect of verification.
  • the indication information used to indicate the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence is the following: One item: the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; the total number of time slot resources corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; The calculation result of the total number of time slot resources and the correction value corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • sending the first request message includes: sending R1 first sub-request messages; wherein one first sub-request message in the R1 first sub-request messages is used to indicate: the adjusted complex
  • R1 is a positive integer.
  • One client may correspond to one or more time slot resources, and one slot resource corresponds to one client.
  • the R1 first sub-request messages are further used to instruct to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence according to the number of S1 time slot resources indicated by the R1 first sub-request messages. In this way, by fully distributing the corresponding relationship between time slot resources and clients, the workload on the second communication device side can be reduced, and the signaling interaction caused by inconsistent correspondence between time slot resources and clients can be reduced.
  • one of the R1 first sub-request messages further includes: an indication for indicating whether the first sub-request message is the last of the R1 first sub-request messages information. In this way, the second communication device can determine whether all the first sub-request messages have been received.
  • the first request message is carried in: a code block for carrying overhead information in a multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the method further includes: receiving a first response message, where the first response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first request message is allowed; sending a first confirmation message, the first confirmation message The message is used to indicate that starting with the first preset code block, the content requested by the first request message is enabled.
  • both parties can explicitly enable the starting position of the content requested by the first request message.
  • the handshake method is also relatively compatible with the prior art.
  • sending the first request message includes: sending R1 first sub-request messages: receiving the first response message includes: receiving R1 first sub-response messages; wherein, R1 The first sub-request message is in one-to-one correspondence with R1 first sub-response messages, and one first sub-response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first sub-request message corresponding to the first sub-response message is allowed.
  • the transmitting side can determine whether any one of the first sub-request messages has been missed by the receiving side.
  • S1 time slot resources in this application may be understood as S1 sub-slots, and may also be understood as S1 time slots.
  • the time slot resource may be a subslot or a time slot.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including: a second communication device receiving a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe included in the second code block sequence; The second communication device obtains the second code block sequence; the second communication device obtains the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code blocks
  • the corresponding relationship of the sequences is to demultiplex the second code block sequence to obtain Q1 first code block sequences; S1 and Q1 are both positive integers.
  • the number of basic frames in a multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the number of time slot resources corresponding to the data carried in one multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the bandwidth corresponding to one multiframe can be adjusted, and then based on The adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the multiframe may further adjust the bandwidth of the service corresponding to the multiframe.
  • one of the first code block sequences in the Q1 first code block sequences may originate from the service of one customer, or may originate from the service of multiple customers.
  • a bandwidth corresponding to a time slot resource may be a preset value, for example, may be 5 Gbps or 10 Mbps, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a multiframe refers to a data segment in a data stream.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame.
  • a basic frame refers to a data segment in a data segment corresponding to a multi-frame.
  • the second code block sequence is obtained by multiplexing the first code block sequence according to the corresponding relationship between each time slot resource and the first code block sequence.
  • the data in one multiframe in the second code block sequence is derived from data corresponding to all time slot resources corresponding to the second code block sequence.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame. One basic frame is used to carry data of a client corresponding to at least one time slot resource.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, wherein a time slot resource corresponding to data in a basic frame is a part of time slot resources among all the time slot resources corresponding to a multiframe.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, a basic frame includes data of a client corresponding to a preset fixed number of time slot resources, and two basic frames in a multiframe, such as called For the first basic frame and the second basic frame, any one of all the time slot resources corresponding to the first basic frame is different from any one of all the time slot resources corresponding to the second basic frame.
  • the second communication device further receives a bandwidth adjustment message, and the bandwidth adjustment message may be sent by other devices, for example, may be a network management apparatus for unified management of the devices.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is used to instruct to adjust the bandwidth corresponding to the client(s) among the Q1 clients, such as increasing the bandwidth or decreasing the bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is also used to indicate the adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients.
  • the second communication device may determine, according to the bandwidth adjustment message, the number of time slot resources included in an adjusted multiframe, and then determine the number of basic frames included in an adjusted multiframe.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be larger, it means that more time slot resources can be used by clients.
  • the number of time slot resources included in the multiframe can also be changed In order to carry the data corresponding to the increased time slot resources, the number of basic frames included in the multiframe can be increased.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be smaller, it means that the number of timeslot resources used by clients is reduced.
  • the number of timeslot resources included in the multiframe can also be reduced. , and then the number of basic frames included in the multiframe is reduced, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing the time slot resources included in one multiframe.
  • the multiframes in the second code block sequence include the first number The basic frame of , the first quantity is greater than the quantity threshold, and the quantity threshold is related to the quantity of time slot resources divided into one time slot and the quantity of time slot resources corresponding to the data included in one basic frame. Because the number of basic frames included in one multiframe is greater than the number threshold, that is, the number of time slot resources included in one multiframe may be greater than the basic value of time slot resources, so that more bandwidth can be allocated to the client.
  • the second communication device adjusts the corresponding relationship between Q1 clients and S2 time slot resources to: the corresponding relationship between Q1 customers and S1 time slot resources; wherein, S2 time slot resources is the time slot resource corresponding to the basic frame in the multiframe before adjustment in the second code block sequence; S2 is a positive integer.
  • One time slot resource in the S1 time slot resources is one of at least two time slot resources obtained by dividing one time slot.
  • the first time slot resource in S2 is the same or different from the second time slot resource in S1.
  • the first request message can be used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • a new signaling that is, the second request message, can be defined.
  • the second communication device further receives a second request message, where the second request message is used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the time slot resources.
  • the second request message is received after the first request message .
  • the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be increased first, and then the corresponding relationship between the corresponding clients and time slot resources on the adjusted multiframe can be adjusted.
  • the second request message is received before the first request message .
  • the service corresponding to the time slot resource to be deleted in the multiframe can be migrated to the reserved time slot resource first, and then the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be reduced, thereby preventing service damage.
  • the second request message further includes: indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between Q1 clients and time slot resources.
  • the adjustment strategy includes: establishing a correspondence between the customers in the Q1 customers and the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources according to the first preset rule. In this way, all the clients and all the corresponding time slot resources in the adjusted multiframe can be rearranged, so that the clients can be more evenly distributed on the time slot resources.
  • the adjustment policy includes: when the first request message is used for requesting to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence: establishing a to-be-deleted rule according to a second preset rule The corresponding relationship between the client corresponding to the occupied time slot resource in the time slot resource and the idle time slot resource in the time slot resource to be reserved; wherein, the time slot resource in the time slot resource to be deleted satisfies the condition: the time slot resource is complex before adjustment The time slot resource corresponding to the frame, and the time slot resource is not the time slot resource corresponding to the adjusted multiframe; the time slot resource in the time slot resource to be reserved satisfies the conditions: the time slot resource is the time slot resource corresponding to the multiframe before the adjustment, and is the time slot resource corresponding to the adjusted multiframe. Since only the clients on the timeslot resources that need to be deleted are adjusted, the number of timeslot resources that need to adjust the corresponding relationship with the clients can be reduced.
  • establishing the correspondence between the clients corresponding to the occupied time slot resources in the time slot resources to be deleted and the idle time slot resources in the time slot resources to be reserved according to the second preset rule includes: setting a first A pointer and a second pointer, the first pointer is used to search for idle time slot resources from the time slot resources to be reserved according to the sorting of the time slot resources, and the second pointer is used to search for the time slot resources to be deleted according to the sorting of the time slot resources. Occupied time slot resources; associate clients corresponding to the occupied time slot resources sequentially found by the second pointer to the free time slot resources found by the first pointer according to the order of the free time slot resources found by the first pointer. In this way, the migration of services on the time slot resources can be completed relatively quickly, and services can be prevented from being missed.
  • the first request message further includes: indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device does not need to determine the maximum index number of the time slot resource according to the information issued by the network management device; The maximum index number of the slot resource is compared, so as to achieve the effect of verification.
  • the indication information used to indicate the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence is the following: One item: the maximum index number of the time slot resource corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; the total number of time slot resources corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; The calculation result of the total number of time slot resources and the correction value corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • receiving the first request message includes: receiving R1 first sub-request messages; wherein R1 One of the first sub-request messages is used to indicate: the correspondence between the time slot resources in the corresponding S1 time slot resources in the adjusted multiframe and the customers in the Q1 customers; R1 is positive Integer; the R1 first sub-request messages are further used to indicate that the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is adjusted according to the number of S1 time slot resources indicated by the R1 first sub-request messages.
  • R1 first sub-request messages are further used to indicate that the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is adjusted according to the number of S1 time slot resources indicated by the R1 first sub-request messages.
  • one of the R1 first sub-request messages further includes: an indication for indicating whether the first sub-request message is the last of the R1 first sub-request messages information. In this way, the second communication device can determine whether all the first sub-request messages have been received.
  • the first request message is carried in: a code block for carrying overhead information in a multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the method further includes: sending a first response message, where the first response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first request message is allowed; receiving a first confirmation message, the first confirmation message The message is used to indicate that starting with the first preset code block, the content requested by the first request message is enabled.
  • both parties can explicitly enable the starting position of the content requested by the first request message.
  • the handshake method is also relatively compatible with the prior art.
  • sending a first response message includes: sending R1 first sub-response messages; wherein R1 The first sub-request message is in one-to-one correspondence with R1 first sub-response messages, and one first sub-response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first sub-request message corresponding to the first sub-response message is allowed.
  • the transmitting side can determine whether a certain first sub-request message is missed by the receiving side.
  • One basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to K0 time slot resources.
  • the number of basic frames included in a multiframe is equal to the quotient of the total number of slot resources and K0.
  • the total number of timeslot resources corresponding to one multiframe corresponding to the bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from S2 to S1. Therefore, the number of basic frames included in one multiframe after bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from the quotient of S2 and K0 to the quotient of S1 and K0.
  • a basic frame sequentially includes: a header code block, K1 data code blocks and a tail code block.
  • the overhead information is carried on the first data code block after the header code block.
  • K1 is a positive integer.
  • S1 time slot resources in this application may be understood as S1 sub-slots, and may also be understood as S1 time slots.
  • the time slot resource may be a subslot or a time slot.
  • the present application provides a communication method, in which a first communication device sends a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the first communication device converts the Q1 first code blocks into the Q1 first code block sequence.
  • the sequence is multiplexed to obtain a second code block sequence; Q1 is a positive integer; the first communication device sends the second code block sequence.
  • one of the Q1 clients may correspond to one or more sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots, and one of the S1 sub-slots corresponds to only one of the Q1 clients. There may also be one or more sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots, and clients are not allocated to the sub-slots. Since the number of basic frames in a multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the number of time slot resources corresponding to data carried in a multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the bandwidth corresponding to a multiframe can be adjusted, and then based on the multiframe The corresponding adjusted bandwidth may further adjust the bandwidth of the service corresponding to the multiframe. It should be noted that the S1 sub-slots are an example of the S1 time-slot resources in the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect.
  • one of the first code block sequences in the Q1 first code block sequences may originate from the service of one customer, or may originate from the service of multiple customers.
  • the S1 time slot resources are sub-slots, in a possible implementation manner, the Q1 first code block sequences are in one-to-one correspondence with the Q1 clients.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to one sub-slot may be a preset value, for example, it may be 5 Gbps or 10 Mbps, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a multiframe refers to a data segment in a data stream.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame.
  • a basic frame refers to a data segment in a data segment corresponding to a multi-frame.
  • the second code block sequence is obtained by multiplexing the first code block sequence according to the corresponding relationship between each sub-slot and the first code block sequence.
  • Data in one multiframe in the second code block sequence is derived from data corresponding to all sub-slots corresponding to the second code block sequence.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame. One basic frame is used to carry data of a client corresponding to at least one sub-slot.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, wherein a subslot corresponding to data in one basic frame is a part of subslots among all subslots corresponding to one multiframe.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, a basic frame includes data of clients corresponding to a preset fixed number of subslots, and two basic frames in a multiframe, such as called For the first basic frame and the second basic frame, any subslot in all subslots corresponding to the first basic frame is different from any subslot in all subslots corresponding to the second basic frame.
  • the first communication device before the first communication device sends the first request message, it further includes that the first communication device receives a bandwidth adjustment message, and the bandwidth adjustment message may be sent by other devices, for example, it may be used for Unified management of the network management device.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is used to instruct to adjust the bandwidth corresponding to the client(s) among the Q1 clients, such as increasing the bandwidth or decreasing the bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is also used to indicate the adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients.
  • the first communication device determines, according to the bandwidth adjustment message, that the bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients needs to be adjusted, and sends a first request message.
  • the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe, and may also be to adjust the number of subslots included in a multiframe.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be larger, it means that more sub-slots can be used by clients.
  • the number of sub-slots included in the multiframe can also be changed The number of basic frames included in the multi-frame can be increased in order to further carry the data corresponding to the increased sub-slots.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be smaller, it means that the number of sub-slots used by clients is reduced.
  • the number of sub-slots included in the multiframe can also be reduced. , and then the number of basic frames included in the multiframe is reduced, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing the number of subslots included in one multiframe.
  • sending the second code block sequence includes: the first communication device, according to the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the adjusted multiframe and the time slot corresponding to the third code block sequence, sends the The second code block sequence and the third code block sequence are multiplexed to obtain the fourth code block sequence; one subslot in the S1 subslots is one of at least two subslots obtained by dividing one time slot; S1 and Q1 All are positive integers; the first communication device sends the fourth code block sequence.
  • two-level multiplexing of data can be performed, so that more suitable small-bandwidth sub-slots can be allocated for smaller services.
  • the multiframes in the second code block sequence include the first number The basic frame of , the first number is greater than the number threshold, and the number threshold is related to the number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame. Since the number of basic frames included in one multiframe is greater than the number threshold, more bandwidth can be allocated to the client.
  • the Q1 clients include a first client and a second client; at least one sub-slot corresponding to the first client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the first time slot; At least one sub-slot corresponding to the second client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the second time slot.
  • the method further includes: combining the Q1 first code block sequences
  • the correspondence between the clients and the S2 sub-slots is adjusted as: the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the S1 sub-slots; wherein, the S2 sub-slots are the sub-times corresponding to the basic frame in the multiframe before the adjustment in the second code block sequence Slot; S2 is a positive integer.
  • the first subslot in S2 is the same or different from the second subslot in S1.
  • the first request message may be used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and sub-slots.
  • a new signaling that is, a second request message, may be defined, and a second request message may be sent, where the second request message is used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and sub-slots.
  • the second request message is sent after the first request message.
  • the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be increased first, and then the correspondence between the corresponding clients and the subslots on the adjusted multiframe can be adjusted.
  • the second request message is sent before the first request message.
  • the service corresponding to the subslot to be deleted in the multiframe can be migrated to the reserved subslot first, and then the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be reduced, thereby preventing the service from being damaged.
  • the second request message further includes: indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the sub-slots.
  • indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the sub-slots In this way, the first communication device and the second communication device can respectively adjust the corresponding relationship between the subslot and the client according to the adjustment strategy, so that the signaling load caused by the transmission of the time slot resource configuration table can be reduced.
  • the adjustment strategy includes: establishing a correspondence between the customers in the Q1 customers and the sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots according to the first preset rule. In this way, all clients and all corresponding sub-slots in the adjusted multiframe can be rearranged, so that clients can be more evenly distributed on the sub-slots.
  • the adjustment policy includes: when the first request message is used for requesting to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence: establishing a to-be-deleted rule according to a second preset rule
  • establishing the correspondence between the clients corresponding to the occupied subslots in the subslots to be deleted and the idle subslots in the subslots to be reserved according to the second preset rule includes: setting the first A pointer and a second pointer.
  • the first pointer is used to search for free subslots from the subslots to be reserved according to the order of the subslots
  • the second pointer is used to search for the subslots to be deleted according to the order of the subslots.
  • Occupied subslots according to the order of the free subslots found by the first pointer, associate the clients corresponding to the occupied subslots sequentially found by the second pointer to the free subslots found by the first pointer. In this way, the service migration on the sub-slot can be completed relatively quickly, and some services can be prevented from being missed.
  • the first request message further includes: indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device does not need to determine the maximum index number of the sub-slot according to the information issued by the network management device; The maximum index number of the time slot is compared, so as to have the effect of verification.
  • the indication information used to indicate the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence is the following: One item: the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; the total number of subslots corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; The calculation result of the total number of subslots corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence and the correction value.
  • sending the first request message includes: sending R1 first sub-request messages; wherein one first sub-request message in the R1 first sub-request messages is used to indicate: the adjusted complex
  • R1 is a positive integer.
  • One client may correspond to one or more sub-slots, and one sub-slot corresponds to one client.
  • There may be one or more sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots, and the sub-slots are not allocated with clients. In this case, the sub-slots may be called idle sub-slots or unoccupied sub-slots.
  • the R1 first sub-request messages are further used to instruct to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence according to the number of S1 sub-slots indicated by the R1 first sub-request messages. In this way, by fully distributing the correspondence between subslots and clients, the workload on the second communication device side can be reduced, and the signaling interaction caused by inconsistent correspondences between subslots and clients can be reduced.
  • one of the R1 first sub-request messages further includes: an indication for indicating whether the first sub-request message is the last of the R1 first sub-request messages information. In this way, the second communication device can determine whether all the first sub-request messages have been received.
  • the first request message is carried in: a code block for carrying overhead information in a multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the first request message is carried in: the first data code block after the S code block in the basic frame in the multiframe of the second code block sequence.
  • the indication information for requesting to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is carried in at least one of the following contents: the first code block The slot table configuration table field; or, the OP code field under the slot configuration table field of the first code block.
  • the indication information for requesting to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is carried in at least one of the following contents: the first code block 9 bits to 12 bits; or, 37 bits to 40 bits of the first code block.
  • the method further includes: receiving a first response message, where the first response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first request message is allowed; sending a first confirmation message, the first confirmation message The message is used to indicate that starting with the first preset code block, the content requested by the first request message is enabled.
  • both parties can explicitly enable the starting position of the content requested by the first request message.
  • the handshake method is also relatively compatible with the prior art.
  • sending the first request message includes: sending R1 first sub-request messages: receiving the first response message includes: receiving R1 first sub-response messages; wherein, R1 The first sub-request message is in one-to-one correspondence with R1 first sub-response messages, and one first sub-response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first sub-request message corresponding to the first sub-response message is allowed.
  • the transmitting side can determine whether a certain first sub-request message is missed by the receiving side.
  • the basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to 24 sub-slots.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to one sub-slot is 10 Mbps.
  • a time slot is divided into 480 sub-slots.
  • the first number is related to: the number of sub-slots divided by N2 time slots, and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in a basic frame; wherein, N2 is Q1 clients The total number of time slots to which the corresponding sub-slot belongs, and N2 is an integer greater than 1.
  • the number of sub-slots in any two of the N2 time slots is equal; the value of the first number is equal to: N2 times the number threshold.
  • the number threshold is: the total number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the quotient of the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame.
  • One basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to K0 sub-slots.
  • the number of basic frames included in a multiframe is equal to the quotient of the total number of subslots and K0.
  • the total number of subslots corresponding to one multiframe corresponding to the bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from S2 to S1. Therefore, the number of basic frames included in one multiframe after bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from the quotient of S2 and K0 to the quotient of S1 and K0.
  • both sub-slots and time slots belong to time-slot resources.
  • the S2 time-slot resources mentioned above are S1 sub-timeslots
  • the S1 time-slot resources are S1 sub-slots.
  • a basic frame sequentially includes: a header code block, K1 data code blocks and a tail code block.
  • the overhead information is carried on the first data code block after the header code block.
  • K1 is a positive integer. In a possible embodiment, K1 is 195.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including: a second communication device receiving a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in a multiframe included in the second code block sequence; The second communication device obtains the second code block sequence; the second communication device obtains the second code block sequence according to the S1 sub-slots corresponding to the adjusted multiframe, and the difference between the sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots and the Q1 first code block sequences Correspondingly, the second code block sequence is demultiplexed to obtain Q1 first code block sequences; S1 and Q1 are both positive integers.
  • the number of basic frames in a multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the number of time slot resources corresponding to the data carried in one multiframe can be adjusted, that is, the bandwidth corresponding to one multiframe can be adjusted, and then based on The adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the multiframe may further adjust the bandwidth of the service corresponding to the multiframe.
  • the S1 sub-slots are an example of the S1 time-slot resources in the foregoing first aspect and the second aspect.
  • one of the first code block sequences in the Q1 first code block sequences may originate from the service of one customer, or may originate from the service of multiple customers.
  • the S1 time slot resources are sub-slots, in a possible implementation manner, the Q1 first code block sequences are in one-to-one correspondence with the Q1 clients.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to one sub-slot may be a preset value, for example, it may be 5 Gbps or 10 Mbps, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a multiframe refers to a data segment in a data stream.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame.
  • a basic frame refers to a data segment in a data segment corresponding to a multi-frame.
  • the second code block sequence is obtained by multiplexing the first code block sequence according to the corresponding relationship between each sub-slot and the first code block sequence.
  • Data in one multiframe in the second code block sequence is derived from data corresponding to all sub-slots corresponding to the second code block sequence.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame. One basic frame is used to carry data of a client corresponding to at least one sub-slot.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, wherein a subslot corresponding to data in one basic frame is a part of subslots among all subslots corresponding to one multiframe.
  • a multiframe includes at least one basic frame, a basic frame includes data of clients corresponding to a preset fixed number of subslots, and two basic frames in a multiframe, such as called For the first basic frame and the second basic frame, any subslot in all subslots corresponding to the first basic frame is different from any subslot in all subslots corresponding to the second basic frame.
  • the second communication device further receives a bandwidth adjustment message, and the bandwidth adjustment message may be sent by other devices, for example, may be a network management apparatus for unified management of the devices.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is used to instruct to adjust the bandwidth corresponding to the client(s) among the Q1 clients, such as increasing the bandwidth or decreasing the bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth adjustment message is also used to indicate the adjusted bandwidth corresponding to the Q1 clients.
  • the second communication device may determine, according to the bandwidth adjustment message, the number of subslots included in an adjusted multiframe, and then determine the number of basic frames included in an adjusted multiframe.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be larger, it means that more sub-slots can be used by clients.
  • the number of sub-slots included in the multiframe can also be changed The number of basic frames included in the multi-frame can be increased in order to further carry the data corresponding to the increased sub-slots.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is adjusted to be smaller, it means that the number of sub-slots used by clients is reduced.
  • the number of sub-slots included in the multiframe can also be reduced. , and then the number of basic frames included in the multiframe is reduced, so as to achieve the purpose of reducing the number of subslots included in one multiframe.
  • the second communication device receives the fourth code block sequence; the second communication device receives the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the multiframe after the adjustment in the second code block sequence, and the third code block sequence In the corresponding time slot, the fourth code block sequence is demultiplexed to obtain the second code block sequence and the third code block sequence; in this way, the data can be double-multiplexed, so that a more suitable small code can be allocated for smaller services. Bandwidth subslots.
  • the multiframes in the second code block sequence include the first number The basic frame of , the first number is greater than the number threshold, and the number threshold is related to the number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame. Because the number of basic frames included in one multiframe is greater than the number threshold, that is, the number of time slot resources included in one multiframe may be greater than the basic value of time slot resources, so that more bandwidth can be allocated to the client.
  • the Q1 clients include a first client and a second client; at least one sub-slot corresponding to the first client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the first time slot; At least one sub-slot corresponding to the second client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the second time slot.
  • the fourth code block sequence is demultiplexed according to the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the time slot corresponding to the third code block sequence
  • the method further includes: adjusting the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the S2 sub-slots into: the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the S1 sub-slots; wherein, the S2 sub-slots
  • the slot is the subslot corresponding to the basic frame in the multiframe before adjustment in the second code block sequence; S2 is a positive integer.
  • One sub-slot in the S1 sub-slots is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing one time slot.
  • the first subslot in S2 is the same or different from the second subslot in S1. In this way, when the number of sub-slots increases, by adjusting the correspondence between clients and sub-slots, clients can be more evenly distributed on the adjusted sub-slots. When the number of sub-slots decreases, by adjusting the correspondence between clients and sub-slots, clients on the deleted sub-slots can be migrated to the reserved sub-slots, thereby preventing service damage.
  • the first request message may be used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and sub-slots.
  • a new signaling that is, the second request message, can be defined.
  • the fourth code block sequence is demultiplexed according to the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the time slot corresponding to the third code block sequence,
  • the method further includes: receiving a second request message, where the second request message is used to instruct to adjust the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the sub-slots.
  • the second request message is received after the first request message .
  • the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be increased first, and then the correspondence between the corresponding clients and the subslots on the adjusted multiframe can be adjusted.
  • the second request message is received before the first request message .
  • the service corresponding to the subslot to be deleted in the multiframe can be migrated to the reserved subslot first, and then the number of basic frames in the multiframe can be reduced, thereby preventing the service from being damaged.
  • the second request message further includes: indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the sub-slots.
  • indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the sub-slots In this way, the first communication device and the second communication device can respectively adjust the corresponding relationship between the subslot and the client according to the adjustment strategy, so that the signaling load caused by the transmission of the time slot resource configuration table can be reduced.
  • the adjustment strategy includes: establishing the correspondence between the customers in the Q1 customers and the sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots according to the first preset rule. In this way, all clients and all corresponding sub-slots in the adjusted multiframe can be rearranged, so that clients can be more evenly distributed on the sub-slots.
  • the adjustment policy includes: when the first request message is used for requesting to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence: establishing a to-be-deleted rule according to a second preset rule
  • establishing the correspondence between the clients corresponding to the occupied subslots in the subslots to be deleted and the idle subslots in the subslots to be reserved according to the second preset rule includes: setting the first A pointer and a second pointer.
  • the first pointer is used to search for free subslots from the subslots to be reserved according to the order of the subslots
  • the second pointer is used to search for the subslots to be deleted according to the order of the subslots.
  • Occupied subslots according to the order of the free subslots found by the first pointer, associate the clients corresponding to the occupied subslots sequentially found by the second pointer to the free subslots found by the first pointer. In this way, the service migration on the sub-slot can be completed relatively quickly, and some services can be prevented from being missed.
  • the first request message further includes: indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device does not need to determine the maximum index number of the sub-slot according to the information issued by the network management device; The maximum index number of the time slot is compared, so as to have the effect of verification.
  • the indication information used to indicate the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence is the following: One item: the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; the total number of subslots corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence; The calculation result of the total number of subslots corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence and the correction value.
  • receiving the first request message includes: receiving R1 first sub-request messages; wherein R1 One of the first sub-request messages is used to indicate: the correspondence between the sub-slots in the corresponding S1 sub-slots in the adjusted multiframe and the clients in the Q1 clients; R1 is a positive integer ;
  • the R1 first sub-request messages are also used to instruct to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence according to the number of S1 sub-slots indicated by the R1 first sub-request messages.
  • one of the R1 first sub-request messages further includes: an indication for indicating whether the first sub-request message is the last of the R1 first sub-request messages information. In this way, the second communication device can determine whether all the first sub-request messages have been received.
  • the first request message is carried in: a code block for carrying overhead information in a multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the first request message is carried in: the first data code block after the S code block in the basic frame included in the adjusted multiframe.
  • the indication information for requesting to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is carried in at least one of the following contents: the first code block The slot table configuration table field; or, the OP code field under the slot configuration table field of the first code block.
  • the first indication information is carried in at least one of the following contents: 9 bits to 12 bits of the first code block; or, 37 bits to 40 bits of the first code block.
  • the method further includes: sending a first response message, where the first response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first request message is allowed; receiving a first confirmation message, the first confirmation message The message is used to indicate that starting with the first preset code block, the content requested by the first request message is enabled.
  • both parties can explicitly enable the starting position of the content requested by the first request message.
  • the handshake method is also relatively compatible with the prior art.
  • sending a first response message includes: sending R1 first sub-response messages; wherein R1 The first sub-request message is in one-to-one correspondence with R1 first sub-response messages, and one first sub-response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first sub-request message corresponding to the first sub-response message is allowed.
  • the transmitting side can determine whether a certain first sub-request message is missed by the receiving side.
  • the basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to 24 sub-slots.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to one sub-slot is 10 Mbps.
  • a time slot is divided into 480 sub-slots.
  • the first number is related to: the number of sub-slots divided by N2 time slots, and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in a basic frame; wherein, N2 is Q1 clients The total number of slots to which the corresponding subslot belongs.
  • the number of sub-slots in any two of the N2 time slots is equal; the value of the first number is equal to: N2 times the number threshold.
  • the number threshold is: the total number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the quotient of the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame.
  • One basic frame is used to carry data corresponding to K0 sub-slots.
  • the number of basic frames included in a multiframe is equal to the quotient of the total number of subslots and K0.
  • the total number of subslots corresponding to one multiframe corresponding to the bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from S2 to S1. Therefore, the number of basic frames included in one multiframe after bandwidth adjustment is adjusted from the quotient of S2 and K0 to the quotient of S1 and K0.
  • both sub-slots and time slots belong to time-slot resources.
  • the S2 time-slot resources mentioned above are S1 sub-timeslots
  • the S1 time-slot resources are S1 sub-slots.
  • a basic frame sequentially includes: a header code block, K1 data code blocks and a tail code block.
  • the overhead information is carried on the first data code block after the header code block.
  • K1 is a positive integer. In a possible embodiment, K1 is 195.
  • the present application further provides a communication device.
  • the communication apparatus may be any device of a sending end (eg, a first communication device) or a device of a receiving end (eg, a second communication device) that performs data transmission in a wireless or wired manner.
  • a sending end eg, a first communication device
  • a receiving end e.g, a second communication device
  • communication chips or network equipment.
  • the communication device eg, the first communication device or the second communication device
  • the communication device can be used as the above-mentioned network device or a communication chip that can be used for the network device.
  • a communication apparatus is provided, and the communication apparatus is the above-mentioned first communication device or second communication device.
  • a communication unit and a processing unit are included to execute any one of the implementations of any one of the communication methods of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • the communication unit is used to perform functions related to transmission and reception.
  • the communication unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the communication device is a communication chip, and the communication unit may be an input and output circuit or port of the communication chip.
  • the communication unit may be a transmitter and receiver, or the communication unit may be a transmitter and receiver.
  • the communication apparatus further includes various modules that can be used to execute any one of the implementation manners of any one of the communication methods of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a communication apparatus is provided, and the communication apparatus is the above-mentioned first communication device or second communication device. Includes processor and memory. Optionally, it also includes a transceiver, the memory is used to store a computer program or instruction, the processor is used to call and run the computer program or instruction from the memory, and when the processor executes the computer program or instruction in the memory, make the computer program or instruction in the memory.
  • the communication apparatus executes any one of the implementations of any one of the communication methods of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
  • the transceiver may include a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication apparatus is provided, and the communication apparatus is the above-mentioned first communication device or second communication device. Including the processor.
  • the processor coupled to the memory, is operable to perform the method of any one of the first to fourth aspects, and any one of possible implementations of the first to fourth aspects.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
  • the communication apparatus is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a system of chips.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or a chip system.
  • a processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • a system in an eighth aspect, includes the above-mentioned first communication device and the second communication device.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction), when the computer program is executed, the computer executes any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • the method in the manner, or causing the computer to execute the method in any one of the implementation manners of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction) that, when it is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute any one of the above-mentioned first aspects
  • the method in one possible implementation manner, or causing the computer to execute the method in any one of the implementation manners of the first aspect to the fourth aspect.
  • a system-on-chip may include a processor.
  • the processor coupled to the memory, is operable to perform the method of any one of the first to fourth aspects, and any one of possible implementations of any of the first to fourth aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory.
  • Memory used to store computer programs (also called code, or instructions).
  • a processor for invoking and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device on which the chip system is installed performs any one of the first to fourth aspects, and any one of the first to fourth aspects is possible method in the implementation.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a processing device, comprising: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive the signal through the input circuit and transmit the signal through the output circuit, so that the method of any one of the first aspect to the fourth aspect and any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to the fourth aspect is realized.
  • the above-mentioned processing device may be a chip
  • the input circuit may be an input pin
  • the output circuit may be an output pin
  • the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by a transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit that acts as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 1b is a schematic diagram of the architecture of data transmission between two devices in Fig. 1a;
  • Fig. 1c is a possible pipeline division scheme exemplarily shown on the basis of Fig. 1b;
  • Fig. 1d is a possible data transmission scheme exemplarily shown on the basis of Fig. 1a;
  • 2a is a schematic structural diagram of a code block in a 64B/66B encoding format defined in a standard provided by an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 2b is a structural form of an idle code block provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 2c is a structural form of an error code block provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2d is a structural form of a low-power code block provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 2e is a schematic structural diagram of a frame format of a flexible Ethernet protocol provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 2f is a flexible small granularity frame (fine granularity basic unit, fgBU) format provided by an embodiment of the application;
  • 2g is a schematic diagram of a code block structure for carrying overhead information in the frame structure of FIG. 2f;
  • FIG. 2h is a schematic diagram of a possible correspondence table between small particle services and sub-slots provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3a is a schematic flowchart of a possible communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3b is an effect diagram of a data transmission scheme
  • FIG. 3c is an effect diagram of the data transmission scheme after applying the scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5a is a schematic flowchart of another possible implementation of steps S3005 and S3006 in Fig. 3a;
  • Figure 5b is an effect diagram of a data transmission scheme
  • Figure 5c is a schematic diagram of a possible effect after applying the method shown in Figure 5a;
  • FIG. 5d is a schematic diagram of a correspondence table between a small-granular service and a sub-slot corresponding to the large-granular pipeline 70 after the bandwidth is increased in FIG. 5c;
  • Fig. 5e is the frame format of the code block sequence output by the large particle pipeline 70 in Fig. 5c;
  • 6a is a schematic structural diagram of a code block used to carry overhead information on a multiframe in a second code block sequence according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 6b is a schematic diagram of a possible format of an enlarge message, an OK message, and a Do it message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • 6c is a schematic diagram of a possible format of a shrink message, an OK message and a Do it message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • 6d is a schematic diagram of a possible format of an arrange message, an OK message, and a Do it message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • 6e is a schematic diagram of the format of a possible FC message, an OK message and a Do it message provided by an embodiment of the application;
  • 6f is a schematic diagram of the format of a possible FC message, an OK message and a Do it message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7 is a distribution table of a possible correspondence between sub-slots and clients provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1a exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the application scenarios of the embodiments of the present application will be introduced below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • FIG. 1a it includes a network management apparatus 100, a communication device 101, a communication device 2 102, and several intermediate nodes shown in FIG.
  • the device may be a network device, or a chip set inside the network device.
  • the device may be a network device supporting a high-speed Ethernet interface (eg, 200G, 400G).
  • the equipment includes but is not limited to: core routers, edge routers, optical transport network (OpticalTransportNetwork, OTN) transmission equipment, OTN optical service units (Optical Service Unit, OSU), etc. and specific scenarios-oriented network protocol-based radio access network ( Internet Protocol Radio Access Network, IPRAN), Packet Transport Network (PTN) box or box switch equipment.
  • IPRAN Internet Protocol Radio Access Network
  • PTN Packet Transport Network
  • the network management apparatus 100 may be configured to deliver some control or management information to each node, such as bandwidth adjustment information for services (large-granularity services and/or small-granularity services mentioned in the subsequent content) .
  • the first communication device 101 and the second communication device 102 can transmit data to each other through an intermediate node.
  • any one of the first communication device 101, the intermediate node, and the second communication device 102 in FIG. 1a may include a sending module and a receiving module. That is, any one of the communication device 1 101 , the intermediate node, and the communication device 2 102 can serve as both the sending end 121 in FIG. 1 b and the receiving end 122 in FIG. 1 b in some cases. That is, the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application that can be applied to the sending end 121 can be applied to any one of the communication device 1 101, the intermediate node, and the communication device 2 102 in FIG.
  • the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to the receiving end
  • the solution of 122 can also be applied to any one of the communication device 1 101, the intermediate node and the communication device 2 102 in FIG. 1a.
  • the communication device 1 101 in FIG. 1a transmits data to the communication device 2 102 through an intermediate node as an example for description.
  • FIG. 1b exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of data transmission between two devices in FIG. 1a.
  • the solution of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the device interface between the sending end 121 and the receiving end 122.
  • it is applied between the sender interface and the receiver interface.
  • one or more services for example, service 1, service 2... Multiplexing, so as to restore each service.
  • services between the sending end 121 and the receiving end 122 may be dynamically adjusted, such as adding services, deleting services, increasing service bandwidth, and reducing service bandwidth.
  • the sending interface and the receiving end interface in the embodiment of the present application may be a FlexE interface, an OTN interface, an Ethernet interface, etc., or a pipe divided by these interfaces.
  • Fig. 1c exemplarily shows a possible pipeline division scheme based on Fig. 1b.
  • the interface of the sending end 121 and the interface of the receiving end 122 are divided into pipes.
  • Two terms are defined in the embodiments of this application, which are the large particle pipeline and the small particle pipeline.
  • the large particle pipeline and the small particle pipeline are relative terms.
  • a large particle pipeline can be divided into at least two small particle pipelines.
  • the large particle pipeline can be divided into at least two small particle pipelines.
  • the bandwidth of the pipe is larger than that of the small particle pipe.
  • the time slot allocation of the MTN/FlexE is based on a granularity of 5 Gbps, and a channel with a granularity of 5 Gbps in one time slot of the MTN/FlexE may be referred to as a large-granularity pipeline.
  • the Ethernet hard private line technology is based on the MTN/FlexE technology, and provides a smaller-grained pipe bandwidth. or multiple small particle businesses.
  • the small-granularity service in the embodiment of the present application may be relative to the large-granularity service, and the small-granularity service may refer to the service whose bandwidth is less than the bandwidth of a large-granularity pipe. pellet business.
  • a node that needs to multiplex or demultiplex small-granularity services is called a small-granularity node
  • a node that needs to multiplex and demultiplex large-granularity services is called a large-granularity node.
  • a node on a transmission path may or may not be a small particle node.
  • Fig. 1d exemplarily shows a possible data transmission scheme on the basis of Fig. 1a.
  • the communication device 1 101 is used as the sending end 121 to multiplex the small-granularity services carried on the large-granularity pipeline, The multiplexed data is multiplexed with services on other large-granularity pipelines again, and the communication device 1 101 sends the multiplexed large-granularity service to the intermediate node 110 (at this time, the intermediate node 110 serves as the receiving end 122 ). It can be seen that the communication device one 101 belongs to both large particle nodes and small particle nodes.
  • the intermediate node 110 demultiplexes the received data once to obtain data corresponding to each large particle pipeline, and the intermediate node 110 further demultiplexes the data corresponding to the large particle pipeline again, thereby obtaining a small particle service. It can be seen that the intermediate node 110 belongs to both large particle nodes and small particle nodes.
  • the intermediate node 110 in FIG. 1d acts as the sender 121 to multiplex the small-granular services carried on the large-granular pipeline, and the multiplexed data is multiplexed with the services on other large-granular pipelines, and the multiplexed data is reused.
  • the data is sent to the intermediate node 111 (at this time, the intermediate node 111 acts as the receiving end 122).
  • the intermediate node 111 demultiplexes the received data once to obtain data corresponding to each large particle pipeline.
  • the intermediate node 111 does not need to demultiplex the data corresponding to the large particle pipeline 1 again, that is, it does not need to acquire each small particle service, but directly sends the data corresponding to each large particle pipeline to the intermediate node 112 . It can be seen that the intermediate node 111 only belongs to the large particle node and does not belong to the small particle node. Subsequent content is similar to the foregoing, and will not be repeated.
  • the large particle node does not perceive the existence of the small particle service, but only forwards the service of the large particle pipeline, such as the intermediate node 111 of the large particle node 3 .
  • the large-granularity node will perceive the existence of the small-granularity, and demultiplex (or decapsulate) the small-granularity service and forward it, such as serving as the large-granularity node 1 and the small-granularity node Communication device 1 101 of 1, intermediate node 110 as large particle node 2 and small particle node 2, intermediate node 112 as large particle node 4 and small particle node 3, communication device as large particle node 5 and small particle node 4 2102.
  • the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application may be applicable to the case where there are only large particle pipelines, that is, the large particle pipelines are not divided into small particle pipelines. It can also be applied to the case of large particle pipelines and small particle pipelines. There is no limitation in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the subsequent content will be introduced in the case of both large particle pipelines and small particle pipelines.
  • a code block mentioned in the embodiments of this application refers to one bit or multiple consecutive bits, and the information carried on a code block may refer to the information carried on the bits included in the code block.
  • the code blocks in the embodiments of the present application may also have other replaceable names, for example, may be replaced by data units, or replaced by Flit, where Flit may be translated into microchips in some scenarios. It should be noted that some of the embodiments described in the embodiments of the present application using code blocks as an example are also applicable to the Flit scenario.
  • the code blocks in the embodiments of the present application may include two types, namely, data-type code blocks and control-type code blocks.
  • the bits in the code block of the data type can be used to carry the actual data payload, and the bits in the code block of the control type can be used to carry control information.
  • the code blocks of the control type can also be divided into various types of code blocks, such as: head code block, tail code block, idle code block, operation and maintenance management code block, error code block, low power consumption code block and so on.
  • Figure 2a exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a code block in the 64B/66B encoding format defined in the standard, as shown in Figure 2a, the code block is defined by the IEEE Std 802.3-2018.IEEE Standard for Ethenet SECTION SIX standard.
  • the synchronization header area of the code block includes the 0th bit and the first bit of the code block.
  • the code block whose synchronization header is 01 is called data code block, and the data code block can be written as D code block; the code block whose synchronization header is 10 is called control code block.
  • the field D0 of the control code block occupies 8 bits, which can be called the type field of the control code block (the type field can be written as the type field).
  • the control code block can include: head code block, tail code block, Ordered set code block (can also be written as O code block), idle code block (idle code block can also be written as IDLE code block), error code block (error code block Blocks can also be written as error code blocks), low power code blocks, etc.
  • the header code block is a code block with a synchronization header of type 10 and 0x78 in FIG. 2a, which can be written as an S code block.
  • the tail code block can be written as a T code block, including code blocks with a synchronization header of 10 and a type field of 0x87, 0x99, 0xAA, 0xB4, 0xCC, 0xD2, 0xE1, and 0xFF in FIG.
  • the O code block is a code block whose synchronization header is 10 type and 0x4B in FIG. 2a.
  • the control code blocks other than the S code block and the T code block in the control code block may be written as a C code block.
  • Fig. 2b exemplarily shows the structural form of the idle code block
  • Fig. 2c exemplarily shows the structural form of the error code block
  • Fig. 2d exemplarily shows the structural form of the low power consumption code block.
  • the synchronization header areas of the idle code block, the error code block and the low power consumption code block are all 10, and other contents are shown in the figure.
  • the code blocks involved in the embodiments of the present application are illustrated by taking the code block structure form shown in FIG. 2a as an example, but the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to the code block forms defined by other standards, such as 8B/10B, 256B/257B etc.
  • code block sequences such as the first code block sequence and the second code block sequence involved in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the code block sequence in the embodiment of the present application may also have other names, such as code block stream, etc., and the name is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a segment of the code block sequence There may be many forms of continuous code blocks, such as the following example:
  • S represents the head code block
  • D represents the data code block
  • T represents the tail code block
  • I represents the idle code block
  • O represents the O code block.
  • the code block sequence in this embodiment of the present application may include various code block types, such as S code block, D code block, and T code block, and also includes I code block and O code block. block etc.
  • the specific number of a code block is not limited in the above, but only enumerates the possible existence forms of a segment of continuous code blocks in a code block sequence in the embodiment of the present application.
  • a channel with a time slot granularity of 5 Gbps in FlexE is used as a large-grained pipeline. It should be noted that the bandwidth of a large-grained pipeline in this embodiment of the present application is not limited to 5 Gbps, and may also be 6 Gbps, 7 Gbps, or the like.
  • FIG. 2e exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a frame format of a flexible Ethernet protocol provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the frame format in the code block sequence 1211 output by the sender 121 in FIG. can construct a fixed frame format for the transmission of physical ports based on the flexible Ethernet protocol, and perform time slot division based on Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
  • TDM Time Division Multiplexing
  • the data code block sequence can be composed of 64B/66B code blocks with a period of 20, corresponding to 20 time slots, and each time slot has a bandwidth of 5Gbps, which is called a time slot (slot).
  • Flexible Ethernet can be based on a time-division multiplexing frame structure constructed from 64B/66B code blocks.
  • the data on each PHY of FlexE is aligned by periodically inserting FlexE overhead (OH) code blocks, for example, 1 66B overhead code block FlexE OH can be inserted every 1023x 20 66B payload data code blocks.
  • FlexE overhead (OH) code blocks for example, 1 66B overhead code block FlexE OH can be inserted every 1023x 20 66B payload data code blocks.
  • 66B code blocks of 8 lines constitute a protocol frame under the flexible Ethernet protocol
  • the protocol frame can also be called basic frame, Basic frame, single frame, etc., can be written as basic frame, single frame, etc. in English, and the name can be selected according to actual needs, and the embodiment of this application does not specifically limit the name.
  • the frame here may not refer to Ethernet The medium access control (Medium Access Control, MAC) frame, but a data stream, with a specific format).
  • 32 protocol frames under the flexible Ethernet protocol constitute a multiframe under the flexible Ethernet protocol.
  • the English of the multiframe in the embodiment of the present application can also be written as multi frame, and the name can be selected according to actual needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the name.
  • the 0x4B field of 0-7 bits and the 0x5 field of 32-35 bits together constitute the FlexE frame overhead.
  • the header of the code block indicates the flag field.
  • Two management channels can be defined in FlexE OH.
  • the management channel can be used to run the management and OAM communication chain of two Ethernet protocols based on 64B/66B code block sequence encoding of 1.2Mb/s and 1.8Mb/s road. Further, in the embodiment of the present application, 64B/66B encoding may be adopted in the scenario of the 100GE physical layer.
  • the ITU-T MTN reuses the FlexE frame structure, so its frame structure is the same.
  • the bandwidth of a small particle pipeline is smaller than the bandwidth of the large particle pipeline to which the small particle pipeline belongs.
  • a large particle pipeline is 5 Gbps
  • a small particle pipeline is 10 Mbps as an example for schematic illustration.
  • the bandwidths corresponding to the two large particle pipelines can be equal or unequal.
  • the bandwidths of any two small-particle pipelines obtained by dividing a large-particle pipeline can be equal or unequal.
  • the following content is described by taking the bandwidth of each large-particle pipeline as 5 Gbps and the bandwidth of each small-particle pipeline as 10 Mbps as an example.
  • a time slot corresponding to a large-granularity pipeline can be divided into 480 sub-slots, and further a correspondence between the 480 sub-slots and the small-granular service can be established, and then the data of each small-granular service can be multiplexed according to the corresponding relationship.
  • FIG. 2f exemplarily shows a flexible fine granularity basic unit (fgBU) format provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the code block sequence output by the large granularity pipeline 40 is obtained by multiplexing data on multiple small granularity pipelines, that is, the frame format in the code block sequence 411 output by the large granularity pipeline 40 may be called the fgBU frame format.
  • the large-particle pipeline 40 is divided into 480 small-particle pipelines 401, and one small-particle pipeline corresponds to one sub-slot.
  • a multiplexed code block sequence is obtained (the code block sequence output by the large particle pipeline 40 is illustrated in the figure).
  • the code block sequence after multiplexing the small particle service includes at least one multiframe, where one multiframe includes 20 basic frames (as shown in basic frame 0 to basic frame 19 in Figure 2f), and one basic frame includes 24 subframes time slot resource.
  • a multiframe may include all 480 subslot resources of a large granularity pipeline.
  • the basic frame in this embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as a small granularity basic unit (Fine Granularity Basic Unit, fgBU), a small granularity basic frame.
  • the frame structure of the basic frame may be composed of 1 S code block + 195 D code blocks + 1 T code block, and the total length is 197 66b code blocks.
  • eight 65-bit code blocks can be transmitted on one sub-slot resource.
  • Fig. 2g exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a code block structure for carrying overhead information in the frame structure of Fig. 2f, as shown in Fig. 2g, wherein under the 5Gbps pipeline, a multiframe includes 20 basic frames, each The first data code block after the S code block in the basic frame can be used to carry overhead information, and there can be 20 code blocks used to carry overhead information in a multiframe.
  • the overhead (overhead can be Overhead, can be abbreviated as OH) information on a code block can occupy 56 bits, of which the reserved bits (reserve, RES) are 2 bits; Multi-Frame-Indication (MFI) uses 6 bits ( Used under the 5Gbps pipeline: 0 ⁇ 19, and the remaining values are reserved.
  • the type type is used to distinguish the general communication channel (GCC) and bandwidth adjustment, and the type type is 2bits.
  • GCC general communication channel
  • bandwidth adjustment bandwidth adjustment information
  • Fig. 2h exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible correspondence table between small-granularity services and sub-slots.
  • a 5Gbps time slot can be divided into 480 sub-slots, which are respectively sub-slot 0 to sub-slot Slot 479.
  • the time slot resources in the 480 sub time slots can be allocated to the service according to the bandwidth requirement of the service. For example, in FIG. 2h, subslot 0 and subslot 477 are allocated to the service with the service number of 0x444. For another example, in FIG. 2h, subslot 1 is allocated to the service with service number 0x010.
  • the service in the embodiment of the present application may be understood as a client, or called a client. Since the bandwidth occupied by the service is small, it may be called a small particle service or a small particle client.
  • the service number can also be understood as a service identifier, a client identifier, or a client identifier, etc., or as an index number of a service, as long as it can be used to indicate the service. In this embodiment of the present application, both sub-slots and timeslots belong to timeslot resources, and the English name may be written as slot.
  • the general subslot index number or the time slot index number in the embodiment of the present application may be understood as the identifier of the time slot resource, and is used to indicate the time slot resource.
  • Fig. 3a exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a possible communication method, the method is applicable to a first communication device and a second communication device, wherein the first communication device and the second communication device can be the aforementioned Fig. 1a
  • the communication device shown is any two nodes among 101 , intermediate node 110 , intermediate node 111 , intermediate node 112 , and communication device two 102 .
  • the following contents are exemplified by taking the first communication device as the transmitting end 121 in FIG. 1c and the second communication device as the receiving end 122 in FIG. 1c as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • Step S3001 the first communication device sends a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device receives the first request message.
  • the first communication device may determine that the bandwidth of the pipe for carrying the second code block sequence needs to be adjusted. For example, before sending the first request message, the first communication device may receive the pipe bandwidth adjustment information issued by the network management. In a possible implementation manner, when the first communication device determines that the bandwidth of the pipeline for carrying the second code block sequence needs to be increased, the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence may be increased; when When the first communication device determines that the bandwidth of the pipeline for carrying the second code block sequence needs to be reduced, the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence may be reduced.
  • the first communication device receives from the network management apparatus: increase the bandwidth of the pipe used to carry the second code block sequence from 5 Gbps to 10 Gbps. If a 5Gbps is divided into 480 timeslot resources, it can be determined that the increased bandwidth includes 960 timeslot resources. If a basic frame includes 24 timeslot resources, it can be determined that a multiframe needs to include 24 timeslot resources. The number of basic frames increased from 20 to 40.
  • the first communication device may indicate to the second communication device the number of basic frames included in a specific adjusted multiframe. In another possible implementation manner, the first communication device may not indicate to the second communication device the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframe, but the network management device may issue the pipeline to the second communication device. bandwidth adjustment information, so that the first communication device and the second communication device each follow certain rules to determine the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframe.
  • the information used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence may also be: used to indicate the request to adjust the number of time slot resources in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence information, or information used to indicate a request to adjust the length of the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • Step S3002 the second communication device sends a first response message, where the first response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first request message is allowed.
  • the first communication device receives the first response message.
  • the first response message may also be referred to as an OK message or an ACK message.
  • the OK message in the embodiment of the present application may also be written as a confirmation message, and the ACK message in the embodiment of the present application may also be written as a confirmation message.
  • Step S3003 the first communication device sends a first confirmation message, where the first confirmation message is used to indicate that starting with the first preset code block, the content requested by the first request message is enabled.
  • the second communication device receives the first confirmation message.
  • the first confirmation message may be referred to as a Do it message or as a CMT message.
  • the Do it message in the embodiment of the present application may also be written as an execution message, and the CMT message in the embodiment of the present application may also be written as an execution message.
  • the first communication device may send the Do it message three times, starting from the next multiframe boundary in the code block sequence after the three Do it messages, changing the complex data in the second code block sequence.
  • the length of the frame (it can also be understood that the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframe is used to generate the multiframe according to the first request message).
  • the second communication device After the second communication device receives the Do it message three times, in the next multiframe received, it demultiplexes it based on the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframe.
  • Step S3004 the first communication device, according to the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the corresponding relationship between the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code block sequences, the Q1 A first code block sequence is multiplexed to obtain a second code block sequence;
  • Step S3005 the first communication device sends the second code block sequence.
  • the second communication device receives the second sequence of code blocks.
  • Step S3006 the second communication device demultiplexes Q1 first code block sequences from the second code block sequence.
  • one time slot resource in the S1 time slot resources may be the sub-slot mentioned in the embodiment of the present application, or may be a time slot.
  • Q1 first code block sequences are in one-to-one correspondence with Q1 clients, such as an example when S1 time slot resources in the following content are S1 subslots.
  • the Q1 first code block sequences may be a sequence of large particle pipelines.
  • one first code block sequence in the Q1 first code block sequences may be a one-to-many It is obtained by multiplexing the service data of the customers, so in this case, there is no longer a one-to-one correspondence between the Q1 customers and the Q1 first code block sequences.
  • both S1 and Q1 are positive integers.
  • time slot resources in the embodiments of the present application are also time slot resources in essence, and the reason why they are called time slot resources is to distinguish them from the time slots in other subsequent embodiments.
  • the solutions from step S3001 to step S3006 provided in this embodiment of the present application may be applied to an application scenario with only one level of multiplexing, and may also be applied to a scenario with multiple levels of multiplexing.
  • Fig. 3b exemplarily shows an effect diagram of a data transmission scheme
  • Fig. 3c exemplarily shows an effect diagram of a data transmission scheme after applying the scheme provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the bandwidth of the pipe 91 is assumed to be 5Gbps (the pipe bandwidth is also It can be other values, such as 100Gbps, or 10Mbps, etc.), and now the bandwidth of the pipe used to carry the service 90 is increased, for example, a pipe 93 can be added, and the bandwidth of the pipe 93 is also assumed to be 5Gbps.
  • the pipe 92 and the pipe 93 are not in the same bound port. In this case, although the bandwidth of the pipe used to carry the service 90 increases, the service 90 cannot be used. Bandwidth in pipe 93.
  • the length of a multiframe in a code block sequence may be adjusted, and the code block sequence may be a code block sequence obtained by multiplexing code blocks on a small particle pipeline , or it can be a code block sequence obtained after multiplexing the code blocks on the large particle pipeline.
  • the code block sequence may be a code block sequence obtained by multiplexing code blocks on a small particle pipeline , or it can be a code block sequence obtained after multiplexing the code blocks on the large particle pipeline.
  • pipeline bandwidth needs to be increased, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • S1 time slot resources as S1 sub-slots as an example.
  • the time slot resources in each step of Fig. 3a can be understood as sub time slots.
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the four types of bandwidths mentioned in the embodiments of the present application, which will be described in conjunction with FIG. 4 .
  • the bandwidth of the small-granularity service is the rate characteristic of the small-granularity service itself, such as 9 Mbps.
  • the bandwidth of the small particle service can also be understood as the signal bandwidth of the small particle service.
  • the bandwidth of the small-granularity pipeline can also be called the bandwidth of the small-granularity channel, which can refer to the bandwidth in units of 10 Mbps used to carry the small-granularity service.
  • the bandwidth of the small-granularity channel can refer to the bandwidth in units of 10 Mbps used to carry the small-granularity service.
  • the small-granularity channel provides a 10Mbps bandwidth for carrying.
  • the small-granularity channel provides three 10Mbps, that is, 30Mbps bandwidth for carrying.
  • the total bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline used to carry small-grain services can also be called the fgBU-n bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline, or the total bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline fgBU-n, which refers to the total bandwidth used to carry all small-grain channel bandwidths.
  • the fgBU-n bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline or the total bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline fgBU-n, which refers to the total bandwidth used to carry all small-grain channel bandwidths.
  • the small particle pipeline fgBU-n is fgBU-20
  • the corresponding nominal bandwidth is 4.8Gbps
  • the actual bandwidth is 5Gbps.
  • the small grain pipe fgBU-n is fgBU-40
  • the bandwidth is 10Gbps.
  • the large-grain pipeline can also be called a large-grain channel.
  • the bandwidth of the large-grain pipeline can refer to the pipeline bandwidth used to carry the bandwidth of the small-grain pipeline fgBU-n. For example, if a 5Gbps time slot is used to carry the small-grain pipeline fgBU-n, the corresponding The large particle channel bandwidth is 5Gbps; when two 5Gbps time slots are used to carry the load, the corresponding large particle channel bandwidth is 10Gbps.
  • the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can simplify the control plane.
  • the control plane can only deliver the adjustment of the bandwidth change of the large particle channel and the adjustment of the bandwidth change of the small particle channel separately.
  • the specific implementation process can be negotiated by the data plane.
  • the network management can deliver bandwidth adjustment information of large-grained pipes and/or small-grained pipes, and the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can provide a smooth and feasible linkage adjustment method in terms of the data plane.
  • the core idea of data plane operation can refer to the following content.
  • the four bandwidths have a bandwidth nesting relationship.
  • a certain change sequence needs to be followed. For example, as shown in Figure 4, the increase from right to left. Specifically: the bandwidth of the large-granular channel carrying small-granularity services can be increased. It is necessary to increase the bandwidth of the large-grain pipes used to carry small-grain services first, and then increase the total bandwidth of the small-grain pipes used to carry small-grain services (the small-grain pipes that are to be carried in the enlarged large-grain pipes).
  • the increase of fgBU-n refers to the increase of the corresponding subslot resources in a multiframe in the code block sequence, or it can also be said that the number of subslots in a multiframe in the code block sequence is increased. length increase).
  • the bandwidth of the small particle channel may be further increased, and optionally, the actual bandwidth of the service signal may be further increased after that. Adjusting the bandwidth according to a certain order can realize the lossless bandwidth adjustment of large and small granular pipelines. If there is a problem with the changing order of the four bandwidths during the bandwidth change process, it is very easy to cause damage to customer services.
  • the bandwidth of the large-particle pipeline needs to be reduced, it also needs to follow a certain change order, for example, the reduction can be performed according to the order of the four bandwidths from left to right in FIG. 4 .
  • the bandwidth of the service signal can be reduced first (this step is optional), and then the bandwidth of the small particle pipeline can be reduced (this step is optional), and then the time slot in the small particle pipeline fgBU-n can be reduced.
  • Concentrate and organize, and then reduce the fgBU-n bandwidth (this step can be understood as shortening the length of a multiframe in the code block sequence in the embodiment of this application, or in other words, the code block sequence is included in a multiframe.
  • the number of basic frames is reduced, or in other words, the resources of sub-slots included in a multiframe in the code block sequence are reduced), and then the bandwidth of the large-grain pipeline is reduced. Adjusting the bandwidth in a certain order can achieve lossless bandwidth adjustment of large and small particle pipes. If the order is reversed, the bandwidth of small particle pipes will be damaged, which will also lead to damage to customer services.
  • the new step that needs to be redefined is the increase and decrease of the small particle pipeline fgBU-n, that is, the number of time slots and the complex number of time slots it contains. Variation in frame length, and aggregation and sorting of time slots in the small-grain pipeline fgBU-n. Overall, the adjustment to the small particle pipeline fgBU-n needs to be redefined.
  • FIG. 5 a exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of another possible implementation of steps S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 3 a .
  • step S3005 specifically includes the following content:
  • Step S30051 the first communication device multiplexes the second code block sequence and the third code block sequence according to the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the adjusted multiframe and the time slot corresponding to the third code block sequence to obtain the first code block sequence.
  • Step S30052 the first communication device sends the fourth code block sequence.
  • the second communication device receives the fourth code block sequence.
  • step S3006 specifically includes the following content:
  • Step S30061 the second communication device demultiplexes the fourth code block sequence according to the time slot corresponding to the sub-slot in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the time slot corresponding to the third code block sequence to obtain the first code block sequence.
  • the second code block sequence and the third code block sequence are the same.
  • Step S30062 Demultiplex the second code block sequence according to the S1 sub-slots corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the correspondence between the sub-slots and the Q1 clients in the S1 sub-slots to obtain Q1 Q1 first code block sequences corresponding to each customer.
  • One sub-slot in the S1 sub-slots is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing one time slot.
  • Both S1 and Q1 are positive integers.
  • FIG. 5b is an effect diagram of a data transmission scheme
  • FIG. 5c exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible effect after applying the method shown in FIG. The possible beneficial effects are described:
  • Fig. 5b exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a data transmission scheme after the bandwidth of a large-particle pipe for carrying small-particle services is increased.
  • Fig. 5b before the bandwidth is increased, if there is only one large-particle pipe 40 It is used to carry small particle services, and the remaining 19 large particle pipelines are used to carry large particle services (one large particle pipeline is divided into 20 small particle pipelines).
  • the bandwidth of the large-grain pipeline used to carry small-grain services is doubled to 5 Gbps, or another large-grain pipe is also used to carry small-grain services.
  • the large particle pipeline 50 is also used to carry the small particle service, including 480 small particle pipelines 501 thereon.
  • the bandwidth of the large-granularity pipeline used to carry small-granularity services is increased, for example, increased to 10 Gbps, due to the multiplexing of the small-granularity service in a multiframe in the code block sequence. It can only carry data in 480 sub-slots.
  • the number of small-particle pipes used to carry small-particle services is increased to 980, for small-particle services that occupy sub-slots in large-particle pipes 40 (such as the For particle service 2), sub-slots in the additional 480 sub-slots (that is, 480 sub-slots in the large particle pipeline 50) cannot be occupied.
  • the bandwidth corresponding to the small-granularity service 2 will be reduced. It cannot be increased any further.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a solution.
  • the code block sequence in the multiframe After multiplexing the small-granularity service, the code block sequence in the multiframe The number of included basic frames is adjusted, it can also be said that the length of the multiframes in the code block sequence is adjusted, so that when the bandwidth of the large-grain pipeline used to carry small-grain services increases, even if the bandwidth increases.
  • the sub-slot resources of the large-granularity pipeline have been occupied before, and the bandwidth of the small-granularity service can still be further increased.
  • Fig. 5c exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a data transmission scheme after the bandwidth of a large-particle pipeline used to carry small-particle services is increased by applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • a large-particle The pipe 70 (the bandwidth of the large-particle pipe 70 at this time is 5 Gbps) is used to carry small-particle services, and the remaining 19 large-particle pipes are used to carry large-particle services.
  • the bandwidth of the large-particle pipeline 70 used to carry small-particle services is doubled to 5Gbps, and the time slot resources are also occupied by 2, and the remaining 18 large-particle pipelines are still used to carry large-particle services.
  • the number of small particle pipes that can be included on the large particle pipe 70 is 980 (including 480 small particle pipes 401 and 480 small particle pipes 501 ).
  • sub-slots can be allocated for small-particle service 1 and small-particle service 2 from 980 sub-slots. Therefore, for small-particle service 2, if the current large-particle pipeline 40 The sub-slots in 2 have been allocated. If the bandwidth of the large-granular pipe used to carry the small-granular service increases, the bandwidth corresponding to the small-granular service 2 can also be further increased.
  • FIG. 5d exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the correspondence table between a small-grain service and sub-slots corresponding to the large-grain pipeline 70 after the bandwidth is increased in FIG. 5c.
  • the 10Gbps timeslot of the large-grain pipeline 70 is shown in FIG. 5d. It can be divided into 960 sub-slots, which are sub-slot 0 to sub-slot 959 respectively. That is, the sub-slots in the large particle pipeline are numbered uniformly.
  • FIG. 5d exemplarily shows the correspondence table between the sub-slots and the clients adjusted in the embodiment of the present application. Since the table is adjusted in the embodiment of the present application, the number of sub-slots in the table is increased to 960. Therefore, when the first communication device subsequently generates a multi-frame, in a possible implementation manner, when the first communication device generates a multi-frame, only after the data of all the sub-slots in the table has been loaded can it be counted as a complex frame.
  • the end of the frame, and the number of sub-slots that can be carried in a basic frame is preset, such as the preset fixed value of 24 sub-slots. increases, so the number of basic frames in the subsequently generated multi-frames also increases accordingly.
  • the number of sub-slots in the table is reduced, the number of basic frames in one multiframe is also reduced, and the reason is similar and will not be repeated here.
  • Fig. 5e exemplarily shows the frame format of the code block sequence output by the large grain pipeline 70 in Fig. 5c.
  • a multiframe in the code block sequence 711 may include 40 basic frames, and each basic frame includes service data corresponding to 24 sub-slots, that is, a multi-frame can carry 960 sub-slots (as shown in Fig. 5d) data of the corresponding service on the 956 sub-slots shown in .
  • the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence includes the first A number of basic frames, the first number being greater than a number threshold, the number threshold being related to the number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame.
  • the first number is related to the number of sub-slots divided by the N2 time slots and the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame.
  • N2 is a positive integer. Among them, N2 is the total number of time slots to which sub-slots corresponding to Q1 clients belong.
  • the number threshold is: the total number of sub-slots divided into one time slot and the quotient of the number of sub-slots corresponding to data included in one basic frame.
  • the number of sub-slots in any two of the N2 time slots is equal.
  • the value of the first quantity is equal to N2 times the quantity threshold. In FIG. 5c and FIG. 5e, the number threshold is 20, the first number is 40, and N2 is 2 as an example.
  • one multiframe in the second code block sequence includes 40 basic frames, and one multiframe may have 40 for carrying overhead.
  • code block of information can be as shown in the aforementioned Figure 2g.
  • the difference from Figure 2g is that the Multi-Frame-Indication (MFI) uses 6 bits, and the 10Gbps pipeline uses: 0 to 39, and the rest take values reserve.
  • MFI Multi-Frame-Indication
  • a second code block sequence in Fig. 5b (for example, the code block sequence output by the large particle pipe 40) can only be used to carry services carried on the small particle pipe 401.
  • a second code block sequence (such as the code block sequence output by the large particle pipeline 40 ) can be used to carry services carried on the small particle pipeline 4701 and the small particle pipeline 501 .
  • the large particle pipeline 70 may correspond to two time slots.
  • the Q1 customers include the first customer and the second customer.
  • the at least one sub-slot corresponding to the first client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the first time slot (for example, the time slot corresponding to the large particle pipeline 40).
  • the at least one sub-slot corresponding to the second client is one of at least two sub-slots obtained by dividing the second time slot (for example, the time slot corresponding to the large particle pipeline 50).
  • FIG. 5c Another example is used to illustrate the beneficial effects of the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5c if there are three 3.3Gbps small-granularity services, in the solution shown in Figure 5b, only large-granularity services can be used.
  • a 3.3Gbps small particle service is allocated in the pipeline 40
  • a 3.3Gbps small particle service is allocated on the large particle pipeline 50
  • the third 3.3Gbps small particle service can only be placed on other large particles used to carry large particle services.
  • the bandwidth of the large particle pipeline is 5Gbps, which brings about the problem of low bearing efficiency.
  • FIG. 5c provided by the embodiment of the present application, since the bandwidth of the large-particle pipeline 70 is 10 Gbps, three small-particle services of 3.3 Gbps can all be carried on the large-particle pipeline 70, thereby Bearing efficiency during data transmission can be improved.
  • the first request message and/or the second request message in this embodiment of the present application may be carried in a multiframe in the second code block sequence: a code block for carrying overhead information.
  • the code block may be the first data code block after the S code block in the basic frame included in the multiframe.
  • Fig. 6a exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of the structure of a code block used to carry overhead information on a multiframe in a second code block sequence.
  • the 10 bits to 55 bits after the type field of the code block are divided into the following fields, and each field is defined as follows:
  • the 6 bits after the type (Type) field are an operation code (operation, OP) field, including a 2-bit reserved (RES) field.
  • DD field Occupies 1 bit (bit represents a bit in this embodiment of the application).
  • this field can indicate that it is sent from downstream to upstream, and it can indicate downstream done; for example, it can indicate that the downstream node instructs the upstream node to start increasing the bandwidth Adjustment;
  • CMT field occupies 1 bit, when the bit of this field is set to 1, it can indicate the start of doing something; for example, it can indicate the start of time slot adjustment (calendar configuration commit);
  • REQ field occupies 1 bit, when the bit of this field is set to 1, it can indicate a request; for example, it can indicate a time slot adjustment request (calendar configuration request);
  • ACK field occupies 1 bit, when the bit of this field is set to 1, it can indicate a response; for example, it can indicate a time slot adjustment response (calendar configuration acknowledge);
  • Time slot number (fgSlot Number) field occupy 12 bits, representing the destination operation time slot number (time slot number can also be understood as the identification of time slot resources, or the index number of time slot resources) (time slot number field in the embodiment of the present application It can also be referred to as the fgSlot Number field, and the fgSlot Number position mentioned in the embodiment of this application refers to the corresponding bits of the fgSlot Number field);
  • Client ID Occupies 12 bits, and can carry the identification of the client corresponding to the destination operation slot number (the client's identification can also be understood as the identification of the service, the index number of the client, etc.), which is used to indicate the destination operation slot.
  • Reserved (RES) field occupies 9 bits, reserved field (reserved field may also be referred to as RES field in this embodiment of the present application);
  • Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) field occupies 7 bits and is used to carry the check value of the aforementioned 51 bits.
  • the indication information for requesting adjustment of the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence is carried in at least one of the following: The slot table configuration table field; or, the OP code field under the slot configuration table field of the first code block.
  • the indication information for requesting adjustment of the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence may be carried in at least one of the following: 9 bits to 12 bits of the block; or, 37 bits to 40 bits of the first code block.
  • Embodiment A1 is used to describe the case where the first request message is used to request to increase the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • Embodiment A2 is used to introduce the case where the first request message is used to request to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the first request message is used to request to increase the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the first request message may also be called an increase message, and the increase message may also be called an enlarge message.
  • Fig. 6b exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible format of the enlarge message, the OK message and the Do it message.
  • the 4 bits of the op field can be used to distinguish each message , as shown in Figure 6b:
  • the OP field is set to 1100; when the second communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an enlarge message based on 1100 of the OP field, that is, the message is used to request to increase the second code block sequence The number of basic frames included in the multiframe;
  • the OP field is set to 0001; when the first communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an OK message based on 0001 in the OP field, that is, confirm that the second communication device allows the first communication device to the content requested by the first request message sent;
  • the OP field is set to 0100; in a possible implementation manner, when the second communication device receives three Do it messages, it enables the content requested by the first request message, that is, in the next first request message.
  • the multiframes in the two-code block sequence are demultiplexed based on the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframes.
  • the fgClient ID field in the enlarge message can be filled with the reserved client number, and the position of fgSlot Number can be filled with the largest number of the enlarged timeslot (after the 5Gbps large-grain pipeline is increased to 10Gbps, the number of sub-slots changes from 480 become 960.
  • the 960 subslots can be numbered from 0 to 959). But it is worth noting that the most important thing in the enlarge message is the OP code indication.
  • the fgClient ID field and the fgSlot Number field can be left blank, or other information values can be filled, and the content of the illustration is not required.
  • the first request message may further include indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • indication information for indicating the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence.
  • the fgSlot number# field may be set to 0x3BF, which is used to indicate that the maximum index number of a subslot included in a multiframe in the adjusted second code block sequence is 959.
  • the indication information used to indicate the maximum index number of the subslot corresponding to the data carried in the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence is one of the following:
  • the correction value is 0 or 1.
  • the maximum index number in the 960 sub-slots is 959.
  • 959 is obtained according to 960-1, where 1 is the correction value.
  • the first request message is used to request to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframes included in the second code block sequence.
  • the first request message may also be called a shrink message
  • the shrink message may also be called a shrink message.
  • Fig. 6c exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible format of the shrink message, the OK message and the Do it message.
  • the 4 bits of the op field can be used to distinguish each message , as shown in Figure 6c:
  • the OP field is set to 0011; when the second communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is a shrink message based on 0011 in the OP field, that is, the message is used to request to reduce the size of the second code block sequence The number of basic frames included in the multiframe;
  • the OP field is set to 0001; when the first communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an OK message based on 0001 in the OP field, that is, confirm that the second communication device allows the first communication device to the content requested by the first request message sent;
  • the OP field is set to 0100; in a possible implementation manner, when the second communication device receives three Do it messages, it enables the content requested by the first request message, that is, in the next first
  • the multiframes in the two-code block sequence are demultiplexed based on the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframes.
  • the fgClient ID field in the shrink message can be filled with the reserved client number, and the fgSlot Number field can be filled with the number of the smallest subslot or the largest subslot after the pipeline bandwidth adjustment (for example, it will be used to carry small particles
  • the bandwidth of the service is reduced from 10Gbps to 5Gbps, and the total number of sub-slots is reduced from 960 to 480).
  • the most important thing in the shrink message is the OP code indication.
  • the fgClient ID field and the fgSlot Number field can be left blank, or other information values can be filled, and the content of the illustration is not required.
  • the first communication device may adjust the relationship between clients and sub-slots, specifically, may use The correspondence between the Q1 clients and the S2 sub-slots is adjusted to be: the correspondence between the Q1 clients and the S1 sub-slots.
  • the S2 sub-slots are sub-slots corresponding to the basic frame in the multiframe before adjustment in the second code block sequence. S2 is a positive integer.
  • the same adjustment strategy may be followed between the first communication device and the second communication device, and the corresponding relationships between sub-slots and clients may be sorted out respectively.
  • the first communication device may sort out the correspondence between the sub-slots and the customers, and issue the sorted correspondence to the second communication device, and may issue the full amount to the second Communication equipment (this solution will be introduced in the subsequent content, and will not be described here).
  • the above-mentioned first request message may indicate adjusting the number of basic frames in a multiframe, and may also instruct the second communication device to sort out the correspondence between subslots and clients.
  • the second communication device may reply the first response message after arranging the correspondence between the sub-slot and the client, and the first communication device may also arrange the correspondence between the sub-slot and the client, and receive After the first response message is reached, the first confirmation message is replied.
  • the above-mentioned first request message may only indicate that the number of basic frames included in a multiframe is adjusted.
  • a second request message may also be sent, and the second communication device receives the first request message.
  • the second request message is used to instruct to adjust the corresponding relationship between Q1 clients and sub-slots.
  • the second communication device may also send a second response message corresponding to the second request message, and the first communication device may also send a second response message after receiving the second response message A second confirmation message corresponding to the second response message.
  • the second request message is sent after the first request message, so that it first increases the number of basic frames included in the multiframe The number of basic frames in the adjusted multiframe, and then adjust the correspondence between the subslots and clients included in the adjusted multiframe.
  • the first request message is used to request to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence: the second request message is sent before the first request message.
  • the adjustment of the client's corresponding relationship removes the services on the sub-slots that need to be deleted, so as to prevent the service from being damaged due to the reduction of the sub-slots.
  • the bandwidth used to carry small-granularity services is reduced from 10 Gbps to 5 Gbps
  • the number of corresponding sub-slots needs to be reduced from 960 to 480.
  • the time-slot allocation of services may be distributed in 960 sub-slots, so it is necessary to concentrate the sub-slots, that is, arrange them into the 480 sub-slots to be reserved. In the process of sub-slot concentration and sorting, the operation of moving may be involved.
  • the bandwidth used to carry small-granularity services increases from 5Gbps to 10Gbps
  • the number of corresponding sub-slots needs to be changed from 480 to 960.
  • the newly-added sub-slots need to be compared with the original ones.
  • the corresponding placement method needs to be considered, such as placing at the end of the original 480 sub-slots, or intervening in the middle of the original sub-slots.
  • Embodiment A3 is used to introduce an embodiment of sending a second request message for instructing to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and subslots.
  • Embodiment A4 is used to introduce the implementation of the corresponding relationship between sub-slots and clients delivered through R1 first sub-request messages.
  • Embodiment A3 is used to introduce an embodiment of sending a second request message for instructing to adjust the correspondence between Q1 clients and subslots.
  • the second request message may also be called an arrange message, and the arrange message may also be called an arrange message, or a centralize message.
  • Fig. 6d exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible format of the arrange message, the OK message and the Do it message.
  • the 4 bits of the op field can be used to distinguish each message , as shown in Figure 6d:
  • the OP field is set to 1110; when the second communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an arrange message based on 1110 in the OP field, that is, the message is used to request the arrangement of the second code block sequence. the number of basic frames included in the multiframe;
  • the OP field is set to 0001; when the first communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an OK message based on 0001 in the OP field, that is, confirm that the second communication device allows the first communication device to the content requested by the first request message sent;
  • the OP field is set to 0100; in a possible implementation manner, after the second communication device receives three Do it messages, it enables the content requested by the second request message, that is, in the next first
  • the multiframes in the two-code block sequence are demultiplexed based on the updated correspondence between clients and subslots.
  • the fgClient ID field in the arrange message can be filled with the reserved client number, and the fgSlot Number field can be filled with the number of the largest sub-slot after the pipeline bandwidth adjustment (for example, reducing the bandwidth used to carry small-granularity services from 10Gbps) is 5Gbps, the total number of subslots is reduced from 960 to 480).
  • the OP code indication is the OP code indication.
  • the fgClient ID field and the fgSlot Number field can be left blank or filled with other information values. The content of the illustration is not required.
  • a protocol format of a first request message, a second request message, and a corresponding OK message and a Do it message can also be provided.
  • the three kinds of handshake protocols and the REQ, ACK, CMT and other messages used for bandwidth adjustment are distinguished by using reserved bits. Specifically, when the Op code takes a value, the OP code of REQ can be reused, but at the same time, the RES reserved bit needs to be used to distinguish each other, or the bit value of the flag field (the flag field in this application can also be called the flag field) other values.
  • Method 1 Use the flag field (flag field) to distinguish the protocol:
  • flag field when the value of the flag field (flag field) is 0b10, reuse the REQ field (when the field is set to 1, it means the first request message), the ACK field (when the field is set to 1, it means the first response message), the CMT field ( When this field is set to 1, it indicates the first confirmation message), indicating that the negotiation increases the number of basic frames included in a multiframe;
  • the REQ field is reused (when this field is set to 1, it means the first request message), the ACK field (when this field is set to 1, it means the first response message), the CMT field ( When this field is set to 1, it means the first confirmation message), which means negotiation to reduce the number of basic frames included in a multiframe;
  • the REQ field is reused (when this field is set to 1, it means the second request message), the ACK field (when this field is set to 1, it means the second response message), the CMT field ( When this field is set to 1, it indicates the second confirmation message), indicating that the negotiation adjusts the correspondence between the sub-slots included in a multiframe and the client.
  • the correspondence between sub-slots and clients is delivered through the delivered R1 first sub-request messages.
  • the first communication device sorts out the correspondence between the sub-slots and the clients, and sends the sorted correspondence to the second communication device, which may be the full amount.
  • a first sub-request message may be called a full-configuration (full-configurationg, FC) message, and the full-slot configuration message may also be written as an FC message or an FC request message.
  • each node can independently change the number of sub-slots and the length of the multi-frame, as well as concentrate and organize the sub-slots.
  • Embodiment A4 adopts a manner in which the receiving side follows the sending side between two adjacent nodes, and the sending side performs relevant configuration and synchronizes to the receiving side through a protocol handshake.
  • the concentration and sorting of the time slot resources are done by the sending side of the node alone. After completion, by sending the corresponding relationship between the sorted full sub-slots and the client, the small-granularity pipeline fgBU-n sub-slots can be realized. number and multiframe length changes. Specifically, if the number of sub-slots and the multiframe length of the small particle pipeline fgBU-n need to be reduced from 960 timeslots at 10 Gbps to 480 timeslots at 5 Gbps, in this embodiment of the present application, the transmitting side can first The time slots used by the service are sorted into the 480 time slots to be reserved.
  • the sending side defines R1 first sub-request messages (also called R1 first sub-request messages) for the sorted 480 time slots through the embodiment of the present application.
  • the message sent by the time slot configuration in full) is sent to the receiving side of the downstream node.
  • the downstream node responds to the sending side of the upstream node (response messages corresponding to R1 first sub-request messages).
  • the sending side of the upstream node sends a handover enable message (a confirmation message corresponding to the R1 first sub-request messages) to enable the 480 time slots. In this way, the number of time slots and the length of the multiframe are reduced by switching the time slot table.
  • R1 is a positive integer.
  • One of the R1 first sub-request messages is used to indicate: the correspondence between the sub-slots in the corresponding S1 sub-slots in the adjusted multiframe and the clients in the Q1 clients.
  • the second communication device receives R1 first sub-request messages.
  • One of the R1 first subrequest messages further includes: indication information for indicating whether the first subrequest message is the last one of the R1 first subrequest messages.
  • the second communication device may send the OK message after receiving all the FC messages.
  • a first sub-response message is used to indicate that the content requested by the first sub-request message corresponding to the first sub-response message is allowed.
  • the receiving side Rx can follow the time slot configuration sent by the sending side Tx, that is, the receiving side receives the time slot configuration sent by the sending side and use it later.
  • the first communication device (which can be a small particle node) (the sending side) sends the FC message corresponding to the entire time slot configuration to the second communication device (which can be a small particle node) (the receiving side), if there are 480 in the time slot configuration time slots, 480 FC messages need to be sent.
  • the receiving side After the receiving side has received 480 FC messages, after verifying that each message is correct, it can reply with an ACK response message, indicating that it has all been received correctly and is ready for switching.
  • the first communication device After the first communication device receives the ACK message, it will send three CMT messages at the boundary of the small particle multiframe to indicate that the handover takes effect at the next multiframe boundary and uses the time slot configuration just sent. After the CMT message is sent, at the next multiframe boundary, the two nodes simultaneously switch to take effect and enable the new configuration.
  • Fig. 6e exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a possible format of the FC message, the OK message and the Do it message.
  • the 4 bits of the op field can be used to distinguish each message , as shown in Figure 6e:
  • the OP field is set to 1010; when the second communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an FC message based on 1010 in the OP field; that is, the message is used to indicate that the client receiving the FC message is carried.
  • the corresponding relationship with the sub-slots can also indicate the request to enable the updated sub-slots and the client's correspondence after the completion of sending the R1 FC messages, and the number of sub-slots in the adjusted multiframe;
  • the OP field is set to 0001; when the first communication device receives the overhead information, it can confirm that the message is an OK message based on 0001 in the OP field, that is, confirm that the second communication device allows the first communication device to the content requested by the first request message sent;
  • the OP field is set to 0100; in a possible implementation manner, when the second communication device receives three Do it messages, it enables the content requested by the R1 first sub-request messages, that is, Demultiplexing is performed in the multiframe in the next second code block sequence based on the updated correspondence between clients and subslots, and the number of basic frames included in the adjusted multiframe.
  • the fgClient ID field in the FC message can be filled with the client number corresponding to the subslot number indicated in the current FC message, and the fgSlot Number field can be filled with the subslot number indicated in the current FC message.
  • the LE field is used to indicate whether it is the last FC message. When it is the last one, the LE field takes a value of 1, otherwise, it takes a value of 0.
  • the Total Num field indicates the total number of sub-slots in this transmission. When the value is n, it means that the number of time slots in this transmission is n*96.
  • Fig. 6f exemplarily shows another possible format diagram of the FC message, the OK message and the Do it message.
  • the 4 bits of the op field can be used to distinguish each message, such as shown in Figure 6f:
  • Identification field distinguish it from the GCC Generic communication channel, the value of 0b00 indicates the message type of bandwidth-related operations, and 0b11 indicates the GCC channel;
  • Last element (LE) field LE is the abbreviation of last Element, and the value carried by the last element field is used to indicate whether it is the last one; a value of 0 indicates that it is not the last one, and a value of 1 indicates that it is the last one (the embodiment of this application).
  • the last element field in can also be called the LE field);
  • OP code field 4 bits, the value of the 4 bits needs to be different from the value in the aforementioned first request message, that is, the value of this field is the same as the first request message of small particles (also called lossless bandwidth adjustment message)
  • the REQ field, ACK field, CMT field, DD field, etc. are distinguished; the value here is 0b1010, which is used to indicate that the message is an adjustment message for the corresponding relationship between subslots and customers related to the small particle pipeline fgBU-n;
  • fgClient ID field 12bits, indicating the ID of the client service number assigned to the corresponding sub-slot; 0x001 ⁇ 0xFFE is valid, 0x000 indicates an invalid client ID, and 0xFFF is reserved.
  • Sub OP field 3 bits, indicating that the adjustment message of the corresponding relationship between the sub-slot and the client of the fgBU-n (also referred to as the FC message channel) belongs to a specific type of message, for example, it is used to indicate that the message is used
  • FgBU-n field 6 bits, indicating the number of sub-slots and the length of the multi-frame in the small particle pipeline, the value is greater than 0.
  • fgBU-4 represents the second code block sequence multi-frame (when the data in the second code block sequence is obtained by multiplexing the code blocks corresponding to the small particle service, it can also be called
  • CRC field The value carried is the 7-bit CRC7 checksum of the aforementioned 41 bits, which can be calculated and generated by the first 41 bits, including a 2-bit identification field (flag field), a 1-bit reserved field and a 38-bit sub-slot reconfiguration message field. . The calculation is performed with the bit sent earlier as the upper bit.
  • the OP field is set to 1010, and the sub op field of 40-47 bits is set to 100;
  • the message is an FC message based on the OP field 1010, and the sub op field is set to 100;
  • the OP field is set to 1010, and the sub op field of 40-47 bits is set to 101; when the first communication device receives the overhead information, it can be based on 1010 of the OP field, and the sub op field is set to Confirm that the message is an OK message for 101;
  • the OP field is set to 1010, and the sub op field of bits 40-47 is set to 001.
  • the fgClient ID field in the FC message can be filled with the client number corresponding to the subslot number indicated in the current FC message, and the fgSlot Number field can be filled with the subslot number indicated in the current FC message.
  • the code block sequence output by a large-granularity pipeline is generated according to the correspondence table between the small-granularity service and the sub-slot corresponding to the large-granularity pipeline during the generation process.
  • a multiframe in the code block sequence includes all the sub-slots corresponding to the large-grain pipeline. It can also be said that a multi-frame in the code block sequence is used to carry data corresponding to all the sub-slots divided by the large-grain pipeline.
  • the receiving side after receiving the full correspondence between subslots and clients, the receiving side interleaves each first code block sequence according to the relation between the subslots and clients, so as to obtain a second code block sequence, the second code block A multiframe in the sequence can carry the updated full amount of data corresponding to all subslots in the correspondence between the subslots and clients, that is to say, when the receiving end uses the updated correspondence between subslots and clients
  • the multiframe in the second code block sequence since the number of subslots carried in one multiframe is defined in the embodiments of the present application to be the number of all subslots corresponding to the pipeline outputting the second code block sequence, the complex The number of sub-slots included in the frame will be updated with the corresponding relationship between the delivered sub-slots and clients, that is, the number of basic frames included in the multi-frame will be updated with the total delivered sub-slots and the client. The corresponding relationship of the customer is updated. It can also be understood that the distribution of
  • the following embodiments of the present application also provide the following adjustment strategies for the correspondence between subslots and clients. It should be noted that, some contents in the embodiments of the present application are introduced by taking S1 time slot resources as S1 sub-slots as an example, and the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to S time slot resources as S1 sub-slots. time slot. For example, the following adjustment strategies, other contents will not be listed one by one.
  • the total number of sub-slots included in the pipeline before adjustment is S2
  • the total number of sub-slots included in the pipeline after adjustment is S1
  • the number of clients is always Q1
  • S1 and S2 are both positive integers.
  • S2 may be smaller than S1. For example, if the bandwidth of the pipeline used to carry small-granularity services is adjusted from 5Gbps to 10Gbps, S2 is 480 and S1 is 960.
  • S2 may also be equal to S1.
  • the number of sub-slots has not changed, but it is possible that the positions of the sub-slots have been migrated. 5Gbps pipeline for particle business.
  • S2 may be greater than S1.
  • S2 is 960 and S1 is 480 (in this case, the network management device or other devices will also indicate the specific reserved sub- Which sub-slots are the time slots, for example, sub-slot 0 to sub-slot 479 can be reserved (a sub-slot being reserved means that the sub-slot is still used to carry small-grain services in Q1 customers) , and delete the sub-slot 480 to the sub-slot 959 (a sub-slot being deleted means that the sub-slot is no longer used to carry the small-granular services in the Q1 customers, for example, it is possible to reduce the 5Gbps timeslot resources are used to carry large-granularity services)).
  • the policy B1 is adjusted, and the correspondence between the customers in the Q1 customers and the sub-slots in the S1 sub-slots is established according to the first preset rule.
  • the adjustment strategy B1 is equivalent to a full-scale algorithm, that is, recalculation of sub-slot allocation is performed in the target pipeline, and the correspondence between all sub-slots and customers needs to be recalculated.
  • Adjustment strategy B2 in the case where the first request message is used to request to reduce the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence (that is, in the case where the number of subslots included in the multiframe is reduced, such as from 960 sub-slots are reduced to 480 sub-slots): according to the second preset rule, establish the correspondence between the clients corresponding to the occupied sub-slots in the to-be-deleted sub-slots and the idle sub-slots in the to-be-reserved subslots.
  • the subslots in the subslots to be deleted satisfy the conditions: the subslots are the subslots corresponding to the multiframe before adjustment, and the subslots are not the subslots corresponding to the adjusted multiframe.
  • the subslots in the subslots to be reserved satisfy the conditions: the subslots are the subslots corresponding to the multiframe before adjustment, and are the subslots corresponding to the adjusted multiframe.
  • the adjustment strategy B2 can be understood as an incremental algorithm, that is, the clients corresponding to the occupied sub-slots in the pipeline to be deleted are incrementally added to the pipeline to be reserved (only the client relationships corresponding to some sub-slots need to be changed).
  • the first preset rule may or may not be the same as the second preset rule.
  • Adjust policy B3 in which the first pointer and the second pointer are set.
  • the first pointer is used to search for free subslots from subslots to be reserved according to the order of subslots
  • the second pointer is used to search for occupied subslots from subslots to be deleted according to the order of subslots.
  • the clients corresponding to the occupied sub-slots sequentially found by the second pointer are associated with the free sub-slots found by the first pointer.
  • the adjustment strategy B3 may also belong to one of the adjustment strategies B2.
  • the following describes the adjustment strategy B3 in conjunction with the distribution table of a possible correspondence between sub-slots and clients as exemplarily shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the 960 sub-slots are placed according to the structure of Figure 7, that is, the 10Gbps large-granular channel bandwidth is divided into 10 lines and placed, each line has 96 time slots, and the corresponding large-granular channel bandwidth is 1Gbps. If the channel bandwidth needs to be reduced from 10Gbps to 5Gbps, then 5 rows need to be deleted. If you know that the first 5 rows are reserved time slots, and the last 5 rows are the time slots to be sorted out, start:
  • Pointer A pointer A is the first pointer
  • point B pointer B is the second pointer
  • Point A finds an idle sub-slot, it stops searching and waits for pointer B to find the occupied sub-slot (the occupied sub-slot can also be called the sub-slot to be moved);
  • Pointer B finds the occupied sub-slot, and immediately moves the corresponding client of the sub-slot indicated by pointer B to the sub-slot indicated by pointer A;
  • the two repeat the steps 1) to 3), so as to move from the first row to the second row from the beginning of the row to the end of the row, until the corresponding sub-slots in the last 5 rows are occupied. Clients all move to subslots in the first 5 rows.
  • the sent first request message or the second request message may carry indication information for indicating an adjustment strategy for adjusting the correspondence between Q1 clients and sub-slots.
  • the adjustment strategy (or the transfer method) used can be specified in the 2-bit reserved bit field (RES field) after the flag field (flag field) on the code block used to carry overhead information, such as:
  • the reserved (RES) field is 00: it can indicate that the adjustment strategy is the aforementioned adjustment strategy B3 (the adjustment strategy B3 can be called idle time slot insertion and movement);
  • the reserved (RES) field is 01: it can indicate that the adjustment strategy is increased by the incremental algorithm in the aforementioned adjustment strategy B2;
  • the reserved (RES) field is 10: it can indicate that the adjustment strategy is the full algorithm in the aforementioned adjustment strategy B2;
  • the reserved (RES) field is 11: reserved.
  • the network management apparatus may deliver the information of the bandwidth adjustment of the large-granularity service according to the service requirements of the customer. For example, when the bandwidth of a large-granular time slot carrying a small-granularity service needs to be increased, the network management device delivers adjustment information for increasing the bandwidth of the large-granularity service. After the large-granular bandwidth carrying small-granular services increases, the total bandwidth of the small-granular pipeline needs to be increased. After the total bandwidth of the small-granularity pipeline increases, the network management device can deliver the small-granularity service bandwidth adjustment information (the bandwidth adjustment of the small-granularity pipeline, that is, the increase of the pipeline bandwidth allocated by a single service) according to the small-granularity service requirements. The bandwidth of the small particle pipeline corresponding to the existing small particle service is increased, or other small particle services are added.
  • the network management device When the bandwidth of the large-granularity pipe carrying the small-granularity service needs to be reduced, the network management device will first deliver the bandwidth adjustment of the small-granularity service before delivering the corresponding large-granularity bandwidth adjustment information. After the small-particle service bandwidth is adjusted and the time slots corresponding to the total bandwidth of the small-particle pipeline are sorted into to-be-reserved time slots, the network management device delivers the large-particle pipeline bandwidth reduction information.
  • the network management device only needs to deliver the large-granularity bandwidth adjustment information and the small-granularity bandwidth adjustment information respectively, and does not need to perceive the process of changing the total bandwidth of the small-granularity pipeline.
  • the number of basic frames included in the multiframe, or the number of time slots can be adjusted.
  • the pipeline bandwidth can be adjusted to support the on-demand upgrade of service pipelines without affecting customer services, and can support the linkage adjustment of large-particle pipelines and small-particle pipelines.
  • the service carrying efficiency of small-grain pipes can be maximized without causing large bandwidth waste.
  • the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are not aware of services during the bandwidth adjustment process, and since the corresponding relationship between sub-slots and clients is adjusted, no service damage will be caused. It can be seen that, in the embodiment of the present application, large and small particles can be adjusted without loss at the same time, which is relatively simple and practical, and can support smooth upgrade of services.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application may be used interchangeably.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c may be single or multiple .
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or importance of multiple objects degree.
  • first request message and the second request message are only for distinguishing different request messages, but do not indicate the difference in priority or importance of the two request messages.
  • each network element in the above-mentioned implementation includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • the present invention can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may be a first communication device or a second communication device.
  • the communication device may be a network device, or may be a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the network device.
  • the communication device 1301 includes a processor 1302 and a transceiver 1303 .
  • the communication device 1301 may include a memory 1304 .
  • the dotted line in the memory 1304 in the figure further identifies the memory as optional.
  • the communication device 1301 may further include a bus system, wherein the processor 1302, the memory 1304, and the transceiver 1303 may be connected through the bus system.
  • the above-mentioned processor 1302 may be a chip.
  • the processor 1302 may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a system on chip (SoC). It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller). unit, MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • SoC system on chip
  • SoC system on chip
  • MCU microcontroller
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 1302 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor 1302 .
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 1304, and the processor 1302 reads the information in the memory 1304, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • processor 1302 in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory 1304 in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the transceiver 1303 may be configured to send a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the basic frame in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence quantity.
  • the processor 1302 may be configured to, according to the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the corresponding relationship between the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code block sequences, convert the Q1 time slot resources.
  • the first code block sequence is multiplexed to obtain the second code block sequence; Q1 is a positive integer, and the second code block sequence is sent.
  • the transceiver 1303 may be configured to receive a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the basic frame in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence quantity.
  • the processor 1302 can be configured to obtain the second code block sequence; according to the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code block sequence , demultiplexing the second code block sequence to obtain Q1 first code block sequences; S1 and Q1 are both positive integers.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1401 may include a communication interface 1403 and a processor 1402 .
  • the communication device 1401 may include a memory 1404 .
  • the dashed line in the memory 1404 in the figure further identifies the memory as optional.
  • the communication interface 1403 is used for inputting and/or outputting information; when the processor 1402 runs, the communication apparatus 1401 can implement the method on the first communication device side in the above-mentioned related solutions of FIGS. 1a to the method on the side of the second communication device in the related scheme of FIG. 7 .
  • the communication interface 1403 can implement the solution implemented by the transceiver 1303 in FIG. 8
  • the processor 1402 can implement the solution implemented by the processor 1302 in FIG. 8
  • the memory 1404 can implement the memory 1304 in FIG. 8 .
  • the implemented solution will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1501 may be a first communication device or a second communication device, or may be a chip or a circuit , such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the communication device 1501 includes a processing unit 1502 and a communication unit 1503. Further, the communication device 1501 may include a storage unit 1504, or may not include the storage unit 1504. The dotted line in the storage unit 1504 in the figure further identifies the storage as being optional.
  • the communication apparatus may correspond to the first communication device in the above method.
  • the communication unit 1503 sends a first request message, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the processing unit 1502 is configured to, according to the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the corresponding relationship between the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code block sequences, convert the Q1 th A code block sequence is multiplexed to obtain a second code block sequence; Q1 is a positive integer; the second code block sequence is sent through the communication unit 1503 .
  • the communication apparatus may correspond to the second communication device in the above method.
  • the first request message is received through the communication unit 1503, where the first request message is used to request to adjust the number of basic frames in the multiframe included in the second code block sequence.
  • the processing unit 1502 is configured to obtain the second code block sequence; according to the S1 time slot resources corresponding to the adjusted multiframe in the second code block sequence, and the difference between the time slot resources in the S1 time slot resources and the Q1 first code block sequences.
  • the second code block sequence is demultiplexed to obtain Q1 first code block sequences; S1 and Q1 are both positive integers.
  • the processing unit 1502 may be a processor or a controller, for example, a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processing (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit) circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure.
  • a processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the storage unit 1504 may be a memory.
  • the communication unit 1503 is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented as a chip, the communication unit 1503 is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices, or an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
  • the communication apparatus 1501 may be the first communication device or the second communication device in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1502 may be, for example, a processor
  • the communication unit 1503 may be, for example, a transceiver.
  • the transceiver may include a radio frequency circuit
  • the storage unit may be, for example, a memory.
  • the processing unit 1502 may be, for example, a processor
  • the communication unit 1503 may be, for example, an input/output interface, a pin, or a circuit.
  • the processing unit 1502 can execute computer-executed instructions stored in a storage unit.
  • the storage unit is a storage unit in the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc.
  • the storage unit can also be a session management network element located in the A storage unit outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), etc.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • each unit in the foregoing communication apparatus 1501 may refer to the implementation of the corresponding method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the division of the units of the above communication apparatus is only a division of logical functions, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity in actual implementation, or may be physically separated.
  • the communication unit 1503 may be implemented by the transceiver 1303 shown in FIG. 8 above, and the processing unit 1502 may be implemented by the processor 1302 shown in FIG. 8 above.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code or instructions, when the computer program code or instructions are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIG. 1a To the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute FIGS. 1a to 7 .
  • the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system may include a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to perform the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 1a to 7 .
  • the chip system further includes a memory. Memory, used to store computer programs (also called code, or instructions).
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device installed with the chip system executes the method of any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 1a to FIG. 7 .
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more first communication devices and one or more second communication devices.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website site, computer, server, or data center over a wire (e.g.
  • coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless means to transmit to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • a computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • Useful media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disc (SSD)) )Wait.
  • the second communication device in each of the above apparatus embodiments corresponds to the second communication device or the first communication device in the first communication device and method embodiments, and corresponding steps are performed by corresponding modules or units, such as a communication unit (transceiver)
  • a communication unit transmitter
  • processing unit processor
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of units is only a logical function division.
  • there may be other division methods for example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated. to another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • Units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as stand-alone products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods of the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Abstract

一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统，用于通过调整复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量，从而对一个复帧对应的带宽资源进行调整。本申请中第一通信设备发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，对S1个时隙资源中时隙资源对应的Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到并发送第二码块序列。由于可以对复帧中的基本帧的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧对应的带宽进行调整，进而基于复帧对应的调整后的带宽，可以进一步调整该复帧对应的业务的带宽。

Description

一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2021年02月10日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110185075.1、申请名称为“一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统。
背景技术
随着5G时代的到来，各种新型业务(如云服务、车联网等)不断涌现，对以太网技术提出了新的需求，产生了多种技术，包括灵活以太网技术(Flex Ethernet，FlexE)，城域传输网络技术(Metro Transport Network，MTN)和光传送网络技术(Optical Transport Network，OTN)及其中的小颗粒技术光业务单元通道层网络(Optical Switching Unit，OSU)等。
FlexE是一种轻量级增强以太网技术，支持端口绑定，支持通道化技术，能够构建端到端链路。灵活以太网通过端口绑定，支持更大带宽，如绑定8个100Gbps(bps为单位bit/s，可以简写为bps)端口实现800Gbps带宽；通过通道化技术，实现带宽的灵活分配，支持多样化的业务速率接入，不必受制于IEEE 802.3标准制定的阶梯型速率体系。同时，FlexE将100Gbps接口划分成20个时隙，每个时隙为5Gbps，因此FlexE可通过时隙分配方式支持N*5Gbps业务。由于FlexE分配的带宽必须是以5Gbps为基本单元，FlexE对非5Gbps颗粒的业务，包括小于5Gbps的业务，存在承载效率问题。
MTN，在FlexE技术的基础上，提供了通道转发和操作维护管理(Operations,Administration,and Maintenance，OAM)等功能。其对应的时隙分配与FlexE一样，也是5Gbps为粒度，所以也存在承载效率的问题，尤其是对于小颗粒业务，比如带宽需求为10Mbps，100Mbps业务。
以太硬专线技术是在MTN/FlexE技术的基础上，提供更小粒度的管道带宽。通常地，将MTN/FlexE一个时隙粒度5Gbps的通道称为大颗粒管道。小颗粒业务承载在大颗粒的管道中，即小颗粒业务占用1个5Gbps。小颗粒业务带宽最小为10Mbps，5Gbps大颗粒管道提供480个小颗粒时隙来承载小颗粒业务。
在实际应用中，大颗粒业务或小颗粒业务的带宽需求可能会发生变化，目前亟需一种应用于带宽调整的方案。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统，用于通过调整复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量，从而对一个复帧对应的带宽资源进行调整。
第一方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，该方法中，第一通信设备发送第一请求消息， 第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。第一通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列；Q1为正整数。第一通信设备发送第二码块序列。如此，由于可以对复帧中的基本帧的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧对应的带宽进行调整，进而基于复帧对应的调整后的带宽，可以进一步调整该复帧对应的业务的带宽。
一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列中的一条第一码块序列可以来源于一个客户的业务，也可以来源于多个客户的业务。
本申请实施例中一个时隙资源对应的带宽可以是预设的值，比如可以是5Gbps，也可以是10Mbps，本申请实施例中不做限定。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧指一个数据流中一个数据片段。一个复帧中包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧是指一个复帧对应的数据片段中的一个数据片段。
本申请实施例中第二码块序列是根据各个时隙资源与第一码块序列的对应关系，对第一码块序列进行复用后得到的。第二码块序列中的一个复帧中的数据来源于第二码块序列对应的所有时隙资源对应的数据。一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧用于承载至少一个时隙资源对应的客户的数据。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，其中，一个基本帧中数据对应的时隙资源为一个复帧对应的全部时隙资源中的部分时隙资源。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，一个基本帧包括预设的固定数量的时隙资源对应的客户的数据，一个复帧中的两个基本帧，比如称为第一基本帧和第二基本帧，第一基本帧对应的所有时隙资源中任一个时隙资源与第二基本帧对应的所有时隙资源中的任一个时隙资源不同。
一个基本帧用于承载K0个时隙资源对应的数据。一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量等于时隙资源总数量S1与K0的商。
本申请实施例中，带宽调整后对应的一个复帧对应的时隙资源的总数量从S2调整至S1。因此带宽调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量从S2与K0的商调整至S1与K0的商。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个基本帧依次包括：一个头码块、K1个数据码块和1个尾码块。其中，头码块之后的第一个数据码块上承载有开销信息。K1为正整数。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备在发送第一请求消息之前，还包括第一通信设备接收带宽调整消息，带宽调整消息可以是其他设备发送的，比如可以是用于对设备进行统一管理的网管装置。带宽调整消息用于指示对Q1个客户中的客户(一个或多个)对应的带宽进行调整，比如增大带宽或减小带宽。带宽调整消息还用于指示出Q1个客户对应的调整后带宽。第一通信设备根据带宽调整消息，确定Q1个客户对应的带宽需要调整，则发送第一请求消息。第一请求消息用于请求调整一个复帧中基本帧的数量，也可以是调整一个复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量。
比如，当将带宽调整的更大，意味着可以有更多的时隙资源供客户使用，这种情况下，由于时隙资源的增多，因此可以将复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量也增多，进一步为了承载增多的时隙资源对应的数据，因此可以将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量增多。
再比如，当将带宽调整的更小，意味着供客户使用的时隙资源数量减少，这种情况下，由于时隙资源的减少，因此可以将复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量也减少，继而将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量减少，从而达到减少一个复帧中包括的时隙资源减少的目的。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二码块序列中的复帧包括第一数量的基本帧，第一数量大于数量阈值，数量阈值与一个时隙划分的时隙资源的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的时隙资源的数量相关。由于一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量大于数量阈值，从而可以为客户分配更多的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据S1个时隙资源对应的Q1个客户，将Q1个客户对应的Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列之前，还包括：将Q1个客户与S2个时隙资源的对应关系，调整为：Q1个客户与S1个时隙资源的对应关系；其中，S2个时隙资源为第二码块序列中调整前复帧中的基本帧对应的时隙资源；S2为正整数。S2中的第一时隙资源与S1中的第二时隙资源相同或不相同。如此，当时隙资源数量增多时，通过调整客户与时隙资源的对应关系，可以使客户更加均匀的分布在调整后的时隙资源上。当时隙资源数量减小时，通过调整客户与时隙资源的对应关系，可以使被删除时隙资源上客户迁移至被保留的时隙资源上，可以防止业务受损。
为了增加方案的灵活性，一方面可以通过第一请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。另一方面，可以再定义一条新的信令，即第二请求消息，发送第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之后发送。如此，可以先将复帧中基本帧的数量增多，之后再对调整后的复帧上对应的客户和时隙资源的对应关系进行调整。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之前发送。如此，可以先将复帧中将要被删除的时隙资源对应的业务迁移至被保留的时隙资源上，之后再将复帧中基本帧的数量减小，从而可以防止业务受损。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二请求消息中还包括：用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息。如此，第一通信设备和第二通信设备可以各自依据调整策略对时隙资源和客户的对应关系进行调整，如此可以减少二者由于传输时隙资源配置表而带来的信令负荷。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：根据第一预设规则建立Q1个客户中的客户与S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系。如此，可以将全部客户和调整后一个复帧中对应的所有时隙资源全部重排，从而可以使客户较为均匀的分布在时隙资源上。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；其中，待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。由于仅对需要被删除的时隙资源上的客户进行了调整，因此可以减少需要调整与客户对应关系的时隙资源的数量。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系，包括：设置第一指针和第二指针，第一指针用于依据时隙资源的排序从待保留时隙资源中查找空闲时隙资源，第二指针用于依据时隙资源的排序从待删除时隙资源中查找被占用时隙资源；根据通过第一指针找到的空闲时隙资源的排序，将通过第二指针依序找到的被占用时隙资源对应的客户关联至通过第一指针找到的空闲时隙资源。如此，可以较为快捷的完成时隙资源上业务的迁移，且可以防止有业务被遗漏。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中还包括：用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号的指示信息。如此，一方面第二通信设备可以不必再根据网管装置下发的信息去确定时隙资源的最大索引号，另一方面，第二通信设备可以将其与根据网管装置下发的信息去确定时隙资源的最大索引号进行比对，从而起到校验的效果。
为了提高方案的灵活性，在一种可能地实施方式中，用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号的指示信息为以下内容中的一项：第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的总数量；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的总数量和修正值的计算结果。
在一种可能地实施方式中，发送第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；R1为正整数。其中，一个客户可以对应一个或多个时隙资源，一个时隙资源对应一个客户。S1个时隙资源中可能存在一个或多个时隙资源，该时隙资源并未分配客户，这种情况下可以将该时隙资源称为空闲时隙资源或者未被占用的时隙资源。R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据R1个第一子请求消息指示的S1个时隙资源的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。如此，通过全量下发时隙资源和客户的对应关系方式，可以减少第二通信设备侧的工作量，且可以减少两者由于时隙资源和客户的对应关系不一致所带来的信令交互。
在一种可能地实施方式中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：用于指示第一子请求消息是否为R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。如此，可以使第二通信设备确定出是否收到了所有的第一子请求消息。
为了更加与现有技术兼容，在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。
在一种可能地实施方式中，发送第一请求消息之后，还包括：接收第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示允许第一请求消息请求的内容；发送第一确认消息，第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容。如此，通过这种握手协商的方案可以使双方明确启用第一请求消息所请求的内容的起始位置。且该握手方式与现有技术也较为兼容。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在发送第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息的情况下：接收第一响应消息，包括：接收R1个第一子响应消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息与R1个第一子响应消息一一对应，一个第一子响应消息用于指示允许第一子响应消息对应的第一子请求消息所请求的内容。如此，可以使发送侧确定出接收侧是否遗漏某一 个的第一子请求消息。
需要说明的是，本申请中S1个时隙资源可以理解为S1个子时隙，也可以理解为S1个时隙。即时隙资源可以是子时隙，也可以为时隙。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，包括：第二通信设备接收第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；第二通信设备获取第二码块序列；第二通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对第二码块序列解复用，得到Q1个第一码块序列；S1和Q1均为正整数。如此，由于可以对复帧中的基本帧的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧对应的带宽进行调整，进而基于复帧对应的调整后的带宽，可以进一步调整该复帧对应的业务的带宽。
一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列中的一条第一码块序列可以来源于一个客户的业务，也可以来源于多个客户的业务。
本申请实施例中一个时隙资源对应的带宽可以是预设的值，比如可以是5Gbps，也可以是10Mbps，本申请实施例中不做限定。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧指一个数据流中一个数据片段。一个复帧中包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧是指一个复帧对应的数据片段中的一个数据片段。
本申请实施例中第二码块序列是根据各个时隙资源与第一码块序列的对应关系，对第一码块序列进行复用后得到的。第二码块序列中的一个复帧中的数据来源于第二码块序列对应的所有时隙资源对应的数据。一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧用于承载至少一个时隙资源对应的客户的数据。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，其中，一个基本帧中数据对应的时隙资源为一个复帧对应的全部时隙资源中的部分时隙资源。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，一个基本帧包括预设的固定数量的时隙资源对应的客户的数据，一个复帧中的两个基本帧，比如称为第一基本帧和第二基本帧，第一基本帧对应的所有时隙资源中任一个时隙资源与第二基本帧对应的所有时隙资源中的任一个时隙资源不同。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备还接收到带宽调整消息，带宽调整消息可以是其他设备发送的，比如可以是用于对设备进行统一管理的网管装置。带宽调整消息用于指示对Q1个客户中的客户(一个或多个)对应的带宽进行调整，比如增大带宽或减小带宽。带宽调整消息还用于指示出Q1个客户对应的调整后带宽。第二通信设备根据带宽调整消息可以确定出一个调整后的复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量，继而确定出一个调整后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量。
比如，当将带宽调整的更大，意味着可以有更多的时隙资源供客户使用，这种情况下，由于时隙资源的增多，因此可以将复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量也增多，进一步为了承载增多的时隙资源对应的数据，因此可以将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量增多。
再比如，当将带宽调整的更小，意味着供客户使用的时隙资源数量减少，这种情况下，由于时隙资源的减少，因此可以将复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量也减少，继而将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量减少，从而达到减少一个复帧中包括的时隙资源减少的目的。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二码块序列中的复帧包括第一数量的基本帧，第一数量大于数量阈值，数量阈值与一个时隙划分的时隙资源的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的时隙资源的数量相关。由于一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量大于数量阈值，即一个复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量可以大于时隙资源的基本值，从而可以为客户分配更多的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备将Q1个客户与S2个时隙资源的对应关系，调整为：Q1个客户与S1个时隙资源的对应关系；其中，S2个时隙资源为第二码块序列中调整前复帧中的基本帧对应的时隙资源；S2为正整数。S1个时隙资源中的一个时隙资源为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个时隙资源中的一个。S2中的第一时隙资源与S1中的第二时隙资源相同或不相同。如此，当时隙资源数量增多时，通过调整客户与时隙资源的对应关系，可以使客户更加均匀的分布在调整后的时隙资源上。当时隙资源数量减小时，通过调整客户与时隙资源的对应关系，可以使被删除时隙资源上客户迁移至被保留的时隙资源上，可以防止业务受损。
为了增加方案的灵活性，一方面可以通过第一请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。另一方面，可以再定义一条新的信令，即第二请求消息。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备还接收第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之后接收到的。如此，可以先将复帧中基本帧的数量增多，之后再对调整后的复帧上对应的客户和时隙资源的对应关系进行调整。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之前接收到的。如此，可以先将复帧中将要被删除的时隙资源对应的业务迁移至被保留的时隙资源上，之后再将复帧中基本帧的数量减小，从而可以防止业务受损。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二请求消息中还包括：用于指示调整Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息。如此，第一通信设备和第二通信设备可以各自依据调整策略对时隙资源和客户的对应关系进行调整，如此可以减少二者由于传输时隙资源配置表而带来的信令负荷。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：根据第一预设规则建立Q1个客户中的客户与S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系。如此，可以将全部客户和调整后一个复帧中对应的所有时隙资源全部重排，从而可以使客户较为均匀的分布在时隙资源上。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；其中，待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。由于仅对需要被删除的时隙资源上的客户进行了调整，因此可以减少需要调整与客户对应关系的时隙资源的数量。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源 对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系，包括：设置第一指针和第二指针，第一指针用于依据时隙资源的排序从待保留时隙资源中查找空闲时隙资源，第二指针用于依据时隙资源的排序从待删除时隙资源中查找被占用时隙资源；根据通过第一指针找到的空闲时隙资源的排序，将通过第二指针依序找到的被占用时隙资源对应的客户关联至通过第一指针找到的空闲时隙资源。如此，可以较为快捷的完成时隙资源上业务的迁移，且可以防止有业务被遗漏。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中还包括：用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号的指示信息。如此，一方面第二通信设备可以不必再根据网管装置下发的信息去确定时隙资源的最大索引号，另一方面，第二通信设备可以将其与根据网管装置下发的信息去确定时隙资源的最大索引号进行比对，从而起到校验的效果。
为了提高方案的灵活性，在一种可能地实施方式中，用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号的指示信息为以下内容中的一项：第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的最大索引号；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的总数量；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的总数量和修正值的计算结果。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息还用于指示更新客户与时隙资源的对应关系的情况下：接收第一请求消息包括：接收R1个第一子请求消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；R1为正整数；R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据R1个第一子请求消息指示的S1个时隙资源的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。如此，通过全量下发时隙资源和客户的对应关系方式，可以减少第二通信设备侧的工作量，且可以减少两者由于时隙资源和客户的对应关系不一致所带来的信令交互。
在一种可能地实施方式中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：用于指示第一子请求消息是否为R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。如此，可以使第二通信设备确定出是否收到了所有的第一子请求消息。
为了更加与现有技术兼容，在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。
在一种可能地实施方式中，接收第一请求消息之后，还包括：发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示允许第一请求消息请求的内容；接收第一确认消息，第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容。如此，通过这种握手协商的方案可以使双方明确启用第一请求消息所请求的内容的起始位置。且该握手方式与现有技术也较为兼容。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在接收第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息的情况下：发送第一响应消息，包括：发送R1个第一子响应消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息与R1个第一子响应消息一一对应，一个第一子响应消息用于指示允许第一子响应消息对应的第一子请求消息所请求的内容。如此，可以使发送侧确定出接收侧是否遗漏某一个的第一子请求消息。
一个基本帧用于承载K0个时隙资源对应的数据。一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量等 于时隙资源总数量与K0的商。本申请实施例中，带宽调整后对应的一个复帧对应的时隙资源的总数量从S2调整至S1。因此带宽调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量从S2与K0的商调整至S1与K0的商。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个基本帧依次包括：一个头码块、K1个数据码块和1个尾码块。其中，头码块之后的第一个数据码块上承载有开销信息。K1为正整数。
需要说明的是，本申请中S1个时隙资源可以理解为S1个子时隙，也可以理解为S1个时隙。即时隙资源可以是子时隙，也可以为时隙。
第三方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，该方法中，第一通信设备发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。第一通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个子时隙，以及S1个子时隙中子时隙与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列；Q1为正整数；第一通信设备发送第二码块序列。本申请中Q1个客户中的一个客户可以对应S1个子时隙中的一个或多个子时隙，S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙仅对应Q1个客户中的一个客户。S1个子时隙中也可以存在一个或多个子时隙，并未为该子时隙分配客户。由于可以对复帧中的基本帧的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧对应的带宽进行调整，进而基于复帧对应的调整后的带宽，可以进一步调整该复帧对应的业务的带宽。需要说明的是，S1个子时隙为前述第一方面和第二方面中的S1个时隙资源的一种示例。
一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列中的一条第一码块序列可以来源于一个客户的业务，也可以来源于多个客户的业务。当S1个时隙资源为子时隙时，一种可能地实施方式中Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应。
本申请实施例中一个子时隙对应的带宽可以是预设的值，比如可以是5Gbps，也可以是10Mbps，本申请实施例中不做限定。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧指一个数据流中一个数据片段。一个复帧中包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧是指一个复帧对应的数据片段中的一个数据片段。
本申请实施例中第二码块序列是根据各个子时隙与第一码块序列的对应关系，对第一码块序列进行复用后得到的。第二码块序列中的一个复帧中的数据来源于第二码块序列对应的所有子时隙对应的数据。一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧用于承载至少一个子时隙对应的客户的数据。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，其中，一个基本帧中数据对应的子时隙为一个复帧对应的全部子时隙中的部分子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，一个基本帧包括预设的固定数量的子时隙对应的客户的数据，一个复帧中的两个基本帧，比如称为第一基本帧和第二基本帧，第一基本帧对应的所有子时隙中任一个子时隙与第二基本帧对应的所有子时隙中的任一个子时隙不同。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备在发送第一请求消息之前，还包括第一通信设备接收带宽调整消息，带宽调整消息可以是其他设备发送的，比如可以是用于对设备进行统一管理的网管装置。带宽调整消息用于指示对Q1个客户中的客户(一个或多个)对应的带宽进行调整，比如增大带宽或减小带宽。带宽调整消息还用于指示出Q1个客户对 应的调整后带宽。第一通信设备根据带宽调整消息，确定Q1个客户对应的带宽需要调整，则发送第一请求消息。第一请求消息用于请求调整一个复帧中基本帧的数量，也可以是调整一个复帧中包括的子时隙的数量。
比如，当将带宽调整的更大，意味着可以有更多的子时隙供客户使用，这种情况下，由于子时隙的增多，因此可以将复帧中包括的子时隙的数量也增多，进一步为了承载增多的子时隙对应的数据，因此可以将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量增多。
再比如，当将带宽调整的更小，意味着供客户使用的子时隙数量减少，这种情况下，由于子时隙的减少，因此可以将复帧中包括的子时隙的数量也减少，继而将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量减少，从而达到减少一个复帧中包括的子时隙减少的目的。
在一种可能地实施方式中，发送第二码块序列，包括：第一通信设备根据调整后复帧中的子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，将第二码块序列和第三码块序列复用，得到第四码块序列；S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；S1和Q1均为正整数；第一通信设备发送第四码块序列。如此，可以对数据进行二级复用，从而可以为较小业务分配更合适的小带宽子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二码块序列中的复帧包括第一数量的基本帧，第一数量大于数量阈值，数量阈值与一个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关。由于一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量大于数量阈值，从而可以为客户分配更多的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个客户中包括第一客户和第二客户；第一客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第一时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；第二客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第二时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。如此，可以看出，客户可分配的子时隙的范围得到增大，从而可以为客户分配更大的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据S1个子时隙对应的Q1个客户，将Q1个客户对应的Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列之前，还包括：将Q1个客户与S2个子时隙的对应关系，调整为：Q1个客户与S1个子时隙的对应关系；其中，S2个子时隙为第二码块序列中调整前复帧中的基本帧对应的子时隙；S2为正整数。S2中的第一子时隙与S1中的第二子时隙相同或不相同。如此，当子时隙数量增多时，通过调整客户与子时隙的对应关系，可以使客户更加均匀的分布在调整后的子时隙上。当子时隙数量减小时，通过调整客户与子时隙的对应关系，可以使被删除子时隙上客户迁移至被保留的子时隙上，可以防止业务受损。
为了增加方案的灵活性，一方面可以通过第一请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系。另一方面，可以再定义一条新的信令，即第二请求消息，发送第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之后发送。如此，可以先将复帧中基本帧的数量增多，之后再对调整后的复帧上对应的客户和子时隙的对应关系进行调整。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之前发送。如此，可以先将复帧中将要被删除的子时隙对应的业务迁移至被保留的子时隙上，之后再将复帧中基本帧的数量 减小，从而可以防止业务受损。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二请求消息中还包括：用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息。如此，第一通信设备和第二通信设备可以各自依据调整策略对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行调整，如此可以减少二者由于传输时隙资源配置表而带来的信令负荷。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：根据第一预设规则建立Q1个客户中的客户与S1个子时隙中的子时隙的对应关系。如此，可以将全部客户和调整后一个复帧中对应的所有子时隙全部重排，从而可以使客户较为均匀的分布在子时隙上。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除子时隙中被占用子时隙对应的客户与待保留子时隙中的空闲子时隙的对应关系；其中，待删除子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且子时隙并非调整后复帧对应的子时隙；待保留子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且为调整后复帧对应的子时隙。由于仅对需要被删除的子时隙上的客户进行了调整，因此可以减少需要调整与客户对应关系的子时隙的数量。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二预设规则建立待删除子时隙中被占用子时隙对应的客户与待保留子时隙中的空闲子时隙的对应关系，包括：设置第一指针和第二指针，第一指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待保留子时隙中查找空闲子时隙，第二指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待删除子时隙中查找被占用子时隙；根据通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙的排序，将通过第二指针依序找到的被占用子时隙对应的客户关联至通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙。如此，可以较为快捷的完成子时隙上业务的迁移，且可以防止有业务被遗漏。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中还包括：用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息。如此，一方面第二通信设备可以不必再根据网管装置下发的信息去确定子时隙的最大索引号，另一方面，第二通信设备可以将其与根据网管装置下发的信息去确定子时隙的最大索引号进行比对，从而起到校验的效果。
为了提高方案的灵活性，在一种可能地实施方式中，用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息为以下内容中的一项：第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量和修正值的计算结果。
在一种可能地实施方式中，发送第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的S1个子时隙中的子时隙与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；R1为正整数。其中，一个客户可以对应一个或多个子时隙，一个子时隙对应一个客户。S1个子时隙中可能存在一个或多个子时隙，该子时隙并未分配客户，这种情况下可以将该子时隙称为空闲子时隙或者未被占用的子时隙。R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据R1个第一子请求消息指示的S1个子时隙的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。如此，通过全量下发子时隙和客户的对应关系方式，可以减少第二通信设备侧的工作量，且可以减少两者由于子时隙和客户的对应关系不一致所带来的信令交互。
在一种可能地实施方式中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：用于指示第一子请求消息是否为R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。如此，可以使第二通信设备确定出是否收到了所有的第一子请求消息。
为了更加与现有技术兼容，在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：第二码块序列的复帧中的基本帧中S码块之后的第一个数据码块。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中：用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的指示信息承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的时隙表配置表字段；或者，第一码块的时隙配置表字段下的OP code字段。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中：用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的指示信息承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的9比特至12比特；或者，第一码块的37比特至40比特。
在一种可能地实施方式中，发送第一请求消息之后，还包括：接收第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示允许第一请求消息请求的内容；发送第一确认消息，第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容。如此，通过这种握手协商的方案可以使双方明确启用第一请求消息所请求的内容的起始位置。且该握手方式与现有技术也较为兼容。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在发送第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息的情况下：接收第一响应消息，包括：接收R1个第一子响应消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息与R1个第一子响应消息一一对应，一个第一子响应消息用于指示允许第一子响应消息对应的第一子请求消息所请求的内容。如此，可以使发送侧确定出接收侧是否遗漏某一个的第一子请求消息。
为了更加兼容现有技术，在一种可能地实施方式中，基本帧用于承载24个子时隙对应的数据。在一种可能地实施方式中，一个子时隙对应的带宽为10Mbps。在一种可能地实施方式中，一个时隙划分为480个子时隙。在一种可能地实施方式中，第一数量与：N2个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关；其中，N2为Q1个客户对应的子时隙所属时隙的总数量，N2为大于1的整数。在一种可能地实施方式中，N2个时隙中任意两个时隙中的子时隙的数量相等；第一数量的值等于：数量阈值的N2倍。在一种可能地实施方式中，数量阈值为：一个时隙划分的子时隙的总数量，与一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量的商。
一个基本帧用于承载K0个子时隙对应的数据。一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量等于子时隙总数量与K0的商。本申请实施例中，带宽调整后对应的一个复帧对应的子时隙的总数量从S2调整至S1。因此带宽调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量从S2与K0的商调整至S1与K0的商。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中子时隙和时隙均属于时隙资源，在该实施方式中，前文提到的S2个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个基本帧依次包括：一个头码块、K1个数据码块和1个尾码块。其中，头码块之后的第一个数据码块上承载有开销信息。K1为正整数。在一种可能地实施方式中，K1为195。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，包括：第二通信设备接收第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；第二通信设备获取第二码块序列；第二通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个子时隙，以及S1个子时隙中子时隙与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对第二码块序列解复用，得到Q1个第一码块序列；S1和Q1均为正整数。如此，由于可以对复帧中的基本帧的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧中承载的数据对应的时隙资源的数量进行调整，即可以对一个复帧对应的带宽进行调整，进而基于复帧对应的调整后的带宽，可以进一步调整该复帧对应的业务的带宽。需要说明的是，S1个子时隙为前述第一方面和第二方面中的S1个时隙资源的一种示例。
一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列中的一条第一码块序列可以来源于一个客户的业务，也可以来源于多个客户的业务。当S1个时隙资源为子时隙时，一种可能地实施方式中Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应。
本申请实施例中一个子时隙对应的带宽可以是预设的值，比如可以是5Gbps，也可以是10Mbps，本申请实施例中不做限定。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧指一个数据流中一个数据片段。一个复帧中包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧是指一个复帧对应的数据片段中的一个数据片段。
本申请实施例中第二码块序列是根据各个子时隙与第一码块序列的对应关系，对第一码块序列进行复用后得到的。第二码块序列中的一个复帧中的数据来源于第二码块序列对应的所有子时隙对应的数据。一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧。一个基本帧用于承载至少一个子时隙对应的客户的数据。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，其中，一个基本帧中数据对应的子时隙为一个复帧对应的全部子时隙中的部分子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个复帧包括至少一个基本帧，一个基本帧包括预设的固定数量的子时隙对应的客户的数据，一个复帧中的两个基本帧，比如称为第一基本帧和第二基本帧，第一基本帧对应的所有子时隙中任一个子时隙与第二基本帧对应的所有子时隙中的任一个子时隙不同。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备还接收到带宽调整消息，带宽调整消息可以是其他设备发送的，比如可以是用于对设备进行统一管理的网管装置。带宽调整消息用于指示对Q1个客户中的客户(一个或多个)对应的带宽进行调整，比如增大带宽或减小带宽。带宽调整消息还用于指示出Q1个客户对应的调整后带宽。第二通信设备根据带宽调整消息可以确定出一个调整后的复帧中包括的子时隙的数量，继而确定出一个调整后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量。
比如，当将带宽调整的更大，意味着可以有更多的子时隙供客户使用，这种情况下，由于子时隙的增多，因此可以将复帧中包括的子时隙的数量也增多，进一步为了承载增多的子时隙对应的数据，因此可以将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量增多。
再比如，当将带宽调整的更小，意味着供客户使用的子时隙数量减少，这种情况下，由于子时隙的减少，因此可以将复帧中包括的子时隙的数量也减少，继而将复帧中包括的基本帧的数量减少，从而达到减少一个复帧中包括的子时隙减少的目的。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备接收第四码块序列；第二通信设备根据第二 码块序列中调整后复帧中子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列；如此，可以对数据进行二级复用，从而可以为较小业务分配更合适的小带宽子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二码块序列中的复帧包括第一数量的基本帧，第一数量大于数量阈值，数量阈值与一个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关。由于一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量大于数量阈值，即一个复帧中包括的时隙资源的数量可以大于时隙资源的基本值，从而可以为客户分配更多的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个客户中包括第一客户和第二客户；第一客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第一时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；第二客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第二时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。如此，可以看出，客户可分配的子时隙的范围得到增大，从而可以为客户分配更大的带宽。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧中子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列之前，还包括：将Q1个客户与S2个子时隙的对应关系，调整为：Q1个客户与S1个子时隙的对应关系；其中，S2个子时隙为第二码块序列中调整前复帧中的基本帧对应的子时隙；S2为正整数。S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。S2中的第一子时隙与S1中的第二子时隙相同或不相同。如此，当子时隙数量增多时，通过调整客户与子时隙的对应关系，可以使客户更加均匀的分布在调整后的子时隙上。当子时隙数量减小时，通过调整客户与子时隙的对应关系，可以使被删除子时隙上客户迁移至被保留的子时隙上，可以防止业务受损。
为了增加方案的灵活性，一方面可以通过第一请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系。另一方面，可以再定义一条新的信令，即第二请求消息。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧中子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列之前，还包括：接收第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之后接收到的。如此，可以先将复帧中基本帧的数量增多，之后再对调整后的复帧上对应的客户和子时隙的对应关系进行调整。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之前接收到的。如此，可以先将复帧中将要被删除的子时隙对应的业务迁移至被保留的子时隙上，之后再将复帧中基本帧的数量减小，从而可以防止业务受损。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第二请求消息中还包括：用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息。如此，第一通信设备和第二通信设备可以各自依据调整策略对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行调整，如此可以减少二者由于传输时隙资源配置表而带来的信令负荷。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：根据第一预设规则建立Q1个客户中的客 户与S1个子时隙中的子时隙的对应关系。如此，可以将全部客户和调整后一个复帧中对应的所有子时隙全部重排，从而可以使客户较为均匀的分布在子时隙上。
在一种可能地实施方式中，调整策略包括：在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除子时隙中被占用子时隙对应的客户与待保留子时隙中的空闲子时隙的对应关系；其中，待删除子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且子时隙并非调整后复帧对应的子时隙；待保留子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且为调整后复帧对应的子时隙。由于仅对需要被删除的子时隙上的客户进行了调整，因此可以减少需要调整与客户对应关系的子时隙的数量。
在一种可能地实施方式中，根据第二预设规则建立待删除子时隙中被占用子时隙对应的客户与待保留子时隙中的空闲子时隙的对应关系，包括：设置第一指针和第二指针，第一指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待保留子时隙中查找空闲子时隙，第二指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待删除子时隙中查找被占用子时隙；根据通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙的排序，将通过第二指针依序找到的被占用子时隙对应的客户关联至通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙。如此，可以较为快捷的完成子时隙上业务的迁移，且可以防止有业务被遗漏。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中还包括：用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息。如此，一方面第二通信设备可以不必再根据网管装置下发的信息去确定子时隙的最大索引号，另一方面，第二通信设备可以将其与根据网管装置下发的信息去确定子时隙的最大索引号进行比对，从而起到校验的效果。
为了提高方案的灵活性，在一种可能地实施方式中，用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息为以下内容中的一项：第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量；第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量和修正值的计算结果。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在第一请求消息还用于指示更新客户与子时隙的对应关系的情况下：接收第一请求消息包括：接收R1个第一子请求消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的S1个子时隙中的子时隙与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；R1为正整数；R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据R1个第一子请求消息指示的S1个子时隙的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。如此，通过全量下发子时隙和客户的对应关系方式，可以减少第二通信设备侧的工作量，且可以减少两者由于子时隙和客户的对应关系不一致所带来的信令交互。
在一种可能地实施方式中，R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：用于指示第一子请求消息是否为R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。如此，可以使第二通信设备确定出是否收到了所有的第一子请求消息。
为了更加与现有技术兼容，在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息承载于：调整后复帧包括的基本帧中S码块之后的第一个数据码块。在一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中：用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的指示信息承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的时隙表配置表字段；或者，第一码块的时隙 配置表字段下的OP code字段。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一指示信息承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的9比特至12比特；或者，第一码块的37比特至40比特。
在一种可能地实施方式中，接收第一请求消息之后，还包括：发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示允许第一请求消息请求的内容；接收第一确认消息，第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容。如此，通过这种握手协商的方案可以使双方明确启用第一请求消息所请求的内容的起始位置。且该握手方式与现有技术也较为兼容。
在一种可能地实施方式中，在接收第一请求消息包括：发送R1个第一子请求消息的情况下：发送第一响应消息，包括：发送R1个第一子响应消息；其中，R1个第一子请求消息与R1个第一子响应消息一一对应，一个第一子响应消息用于指示允许第一子响应消息对应的第一子请求消息所请求的内容。如此，可以使发送侧确定出接收侧是否遗漏某一个的第一子请求消息。
为了更加兼容现有技术，在一种可能地实施方式中，基本帧用于承载24个子时隙对应的数据。在一种可能地实施方式中，一个子时隙对应的带宽为10Mbps。在一种可能地实施方式中，一个时隙划分为480个子时隙。在一种可能地实施方式中，第一数量与：N2个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关；其中，N2为Q1个客户对应的子时隙所属时隙的总数量。在一种可能地实施方式中，N2个时隙中任意两个时隙中的子时隙的数量相等；第一数量的值等于：数量阈值的N2倍。在一种可能地实施方式中，数量阈值为：一个时隙划分的子时隙的总数量，与一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量的商。
一个基本帧用于承载K0个子时隙对应的数据。一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量等于子时隙总数量与K0的商。本申请实施例中，带宽调整后对应的一个复帧对应的子时隙的总数量从S2调整至S1。因此带宽调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量从S2与K0的商调整至S1与K0的商。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中子时隙和时隙均属于时隙资源，在该实施方式中，前文提到的S2个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，一个基本帧依次包括：一个头码块、K1个数据码块和1个尾码块。其中，头码块之后的第一个数据码块上承载有开销信息。K1为正整数。在一种可能地实施方式中，K1为195。
相应于第一方面至第四方面任一种通信方法，本申请还提供了一种通信装置。通信装置可以是以无线或有线方式进行数据传输的任意一种发送端(如第一通信设备)的设备或接收端(如第二通信设备)的设备。例如，通信芯片、或者网络设备。在通信过程中，发送端的设备和接收端的设备是相对的。在某些通信过程中，通信装置(如第一通信设备或第二通信设备)可以作为上述网络设备或可用于网络设备的通信芯片。
第五方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置为上述第一通信设备或第二通信设备。包括通信单元和处理单元，以执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式。通信单元用于执行与发送和接收相关的功能。可选地，通信单元包括接收单元和发送单元。在一种设计中，通信装置为通信芯片，通信单元可以为通信芯片的输入输出电 路或者端口。
在另一种设计中，通信单元可以为发射器和接收器，或者通信单元为发射机和接收机。
可选的，通信装置还包括可用于执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式的各个模块。
第六方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置为上述第一通信设备或第二通信设备。包括处理器和存储器。可选的，还包括收发器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序或指令，当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令时，使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种通信方法中的任一种实施方式。
可选的，处理器为一个或多个，存储器为一个或多个。
可选的，存储器可以与处理器集成在一起，或者存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选的，收发器中可以包括，发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置为上述第一通信设备或第二通信设备。包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行第一方面至第四方面任一方面，以及第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时，通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。可选地，收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
在又一种实现方式中，该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时，通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
第八方面，提供了一种系统，系统包括上述第一通信设备和第二通信设备。
第九方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法，或者使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法，或者使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面任一种实现方式中的方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统可以包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行第一方面至第四方面中任一方面，以及第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该芯片系统还包括存储器。存储器，用于存储计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)。处理器，用于从存储器调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有芯片系统的设备执行第一方面至第四方面中任一方面，以及第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种处理装置，包括：输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。处理电路用于通过输入电路接收信号，并通过输出电路发射信号，使得第一方面至第四方面任一方面，以及第一方面至第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法被实现。
在具体实现过程中，上述处理装置可以为芯片，输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路，该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。
附图说明
图1a为本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图；
图1b为图1a中两个设备之间数据传输的架构示意图；
图1c为在图1b的基础上示例性示出的一种可能地的管道划分方案；
图1d为在图1a的基础上示例性示出的一种可能的数据传输方案；
图2a为本申请实施例提供的标准中定义的64B/66B编码格式的码块的结构示意图；
图2b为本申请实施例提供的空闲码块的结构形式；
图2c为本申请实施例提供的错误码块的结构形式；
图2d为本申请实施例提供的低功耗码块的结构形式；
图2e为本申请实施例提供的一种灵活以太网协议的帧格式的结构示意图；
图2f为本申请实施例提供的一种灵活小颗粒帧(fine granularity basic unit，fgBU)格式；
图2g为一种图2f的帧结构中用于承载开销信息的码块结构示意图；
图2h为本申请实施例提供的一种可能地小颗粒业务和子时隙的对应关系表的示意图；
图3a为本申请实施例提供的一种可能地通信方法的流程示意图；
图3b为一种数据传输方案的效果图；
图3c为应用本申请实施例提供的方案后的数据传输方案效果图；
图4为本申请实施例中提到的4种类型的带宽的示意图；
图5a为图3a中的步骤S3005和S3006的又一种可能地实施方式的流程示意图；
图5b为一种数据传输方案的效果图；
图5c为一种应用图5a所示的方法后的一种可能的效果示意图；
图5d为图5c中带宽增大后大颗粒管道70对应的一种小颗粒业务和子时隙的对应关系表的示意图；
图5e为图5c中大颗粒管道70输出的码块序列的帧格式；
图6a为本申请实施例提供的一种第二码块序列中复帧上用于承载开销信息的码块的结构示意图；
图6b为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的enlarge消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图；
图6c为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的shrink消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图；
图6d为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的arrange消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图；
图6e为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的FC消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图；
图6f为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的FC消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的子时隙与客户的对应关系的分布表；
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图。
具体实施方式
应理解，本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：移动承载前传或回传领域、城域多业务承载、数据中心互联、工业通讯等基于以太网技术的通讯系统，以及工业或通讯设备内不同元器件或模块之间的通讯系统。
图1a示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种应用场景示意图。下面结合附图对本申请实施例的应用场景进行介绍。
如图1a所示，包括网管装置100、通信设备一101、通信设备二102，以及图1a中示出的若干中间节点，比如中间节点110、中间节点111和中间节点112。网管装置100、通信设备一101、通信设备二102以及中间节点中的任一个设备，该设备可以为网络设备，或为设置于网络设备内部的芯片。该设备可以是支持高速以太网接口(比如200G、400G)的网络设备。该设备包括但不限于：核心路由器、边沿路由器、光传送网(OpticalTransportNetwork，OTN)传输设备，OTN光业务单元(Optical Service Unit，OSU)等以及面向具体场景的基于网络协议的无线电接入网(Internet Protocol Radio Access Network，IPRAN)、分组传送网(Packet Transport Network，PTN)盒式或框式交换机设备。
如图1a所示，网管装置100可以用于向各个节点下发一些控制或管理类信息，比如可以下发业务(后续内容中提到的大颗粒业务和/或小颗粒业务)的带宽调整信息。通信设备一101和通信设备二102之间可以通过中间节点互相传输数据。
图1a中的通信设备一101、中间节点和通信设备二102中的任一个设备均可以包括有发送模块和接收模块。也就是说，通信设备一101、中间节点和通信设备二102中的任一个设备既可以作为图1b中的发送端121，在一些情况下也可以作为图1b中的接收端122。即本申请实施例提供的可以应用于发送端121的方案可以应用于图1a中通信设备一101、中间节点和通信设备二102中的任一个设备，本申请实施例提供的可以应用于接收端122的方案也可以应用于图1a中通信设备一101、中间节点和通信设备二102中的任一个设备。为了更清楚的介绍本申请实施例，后续内容中以图1a中的通信设备一101通过中间节点向通信设备二102传输数据为例进行介绍。
图1b中示例性示出了图1a中两个设备之间数据传输的架构示意图，如图1b所示，本申请实施例的方案可以应用于发送端121和接收端122之间的设备接口之间，比如应用于发送端接口和接收到接口之间。本申请实施例中一个或多个业务(比如图1b中的业务1、业务2…业务m)可以在发送端进行复用，复用后的数据传输至接收端122，接收端122对其解复用，从而恢复出各个业务。本申请实施例中发送端121和接收端122之间的业务可以发生动态调整，比如新增业务、删除业务、增大业务带宽、减小业务带宽等。本申请实施例中发送的接口和接收端接口可以是FlexE接口、OTN接口、以太接口等，或是这些接口划分出的管道。
图1c在图1b的基础上示例性示出了一种可能地的管道划分方案，如图1c所示，将发 送端121的接口和接收端122的接口划分出管道。本申请实施例中定义了两个名词，分别为大颗粒管道和小颗粒管道，大颗粒管道和小颗粒管道是相对而言的，一个大颗粒管道可以划分出至少两个小颗粒管道，大颗粒管道的带宽大于小颗粒管道的带宽。本申请实施例中MTN/FlexE的时隙分配是以5Gbps为粒度，可以将MTN/FlexE一个时隙粒度5Gbps的通道称为大颗粒管道。以太硬专线技术是在MTN/FlexE技术的基础上，提供更小粒度的管道带宽，可以将以太硬专线技术中提供的带宽粒度更小的管道称为小颗粒管道，小颗粒管道用于承载一个或多个小颗粒业务。
本申请实施例中的小颗粒业务可以是相对大颗粒业务来说的，小颗粒的业务可以是指带宽小于一个大颗粒管道带宽的业务，比如可以将带宽需求为10Mbps、100Mbps的业务称为小颗粒业务。本申请实施例中将需要对小颗粒业务进行复用或解复用的节点称为小颗粒节点，将需对大颗粒业务进行复用和解复用的节点称为大颗粒节点。一条传输路径上的节点有可能是小颗粒节点，也有可能不是小颗粒节点。
图1d在图1a的基础上示例性示出了一种可能的数据传输方案，如图1d所示，通信设备一101作为发送端121，将大颗粒管道上承载的小颗粒业务进行复用，复用后的数据与其他大颗粒管道上的业务再次复用，通信设备一101将复用后的大颗粒业务发送至中间节点110(此时中间节点110作为接收端122)。可以看出通信设备一101既属于大颗粒节点，也属于小颗粒节点。中间节点110对接收到的数据进行一次解复用，得到各个大颗粒管道对应的数据，中间节点110进一步对大颗粒管道对应的数据再次进行解复用，从而得到小颗粒业务。可以看出中间节点110既属于大颗粒节点，也属于小颗粒节点。
进一步，图1d中的中间节点110作为发送端121，将大颗粒管道上承载的小颗粒业务进行复用，复用后的数据与其他大颗粒管道上的业务再次复用，并将复用后的数据发送至中间节点111(此时中间节点111作为接收端122)。中间节点111对接收到的数据进行一次解复用，得到各个大颗粒管道对应的数据。中间节点111不需要对大颗粒管道1对应的数据再次进行解复用，即不需要获取各个小颗粒业务，而是直接将各个大颗粒管道对应的数据发送至中间节点112。可以看出中间节点111仅属于大颗粒节点，不属于小颗粒节点。后续内容与前述类似，不再赘述。
从图1d所示的内容可以看出，在小颗粒穿通模式下，大颗粒节点不感知小颗粒业务的存在，只是进行大颗粒管道的业务的转发，如作为大颗粒节点3的中间节点111。在小颗粒交换模式下，大颗粒节点会感知到小颗粒的存在，并进行小颗粒业务的解复用(或者也可以称为解封装)，进行转发，如作为大颗粒节点1和小颗粒节点1的通信设备一101、作为大颗粒节点2和小颗粒节点2的中间节点110、作为大颗粒节点4和小颗粒节点3的中间节点112、作为大颗粒节点5和小颗粒节点4的通信设备二102。一种可能地实施方式中，对于大颗粒节点而言，可以存在着三端链路，比如大颗粒节点1与大颗粒节点2、大颗粒节点2与大颗粒节点3，大颗粒节点3和大颗粒节点4、大颗粒节点4与大颗粒节点5之间的三条链路。对于小颗粒节点而言，只存在端到端的一条链路，比如小颗粒节点1到小颗粒节点4之间的链路。值得说明的是，小颗粒管道总带宽的调整只发生在每段大颗粒链路的首位节点，比如大颗粒节点1和大颗粒节点2之间，大颗粒节点2和大颗粒节点4之间，大颗粒节点4和大颗粒节点5之间；同时，也是只发生在小颗粒的相邻节点，比如小颗粒节点1和小颗粒节点2，小颗粒2和小颗粒节点3，以及小颗粒节点3和小颗粒节点4之间。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例提供的方案可以适用于仅有大颗粒管道的情况下，即未将大颗粒管道划分为小颗粒管道。也可以适用于有大颗粒管道和小颗粒管道的情况。本申请实施例中不做限制，为了后续内容介绍方便，后续内容将以既有大颗粒管道也有小颗粒管道的情况进行介绍。
下面对本申请实施例涉及到的一些名词和术语进行解释。
(1)码块。
本申请实施例中提到的一个码块是指一个比特位或多个连续的比特位，一个码块上承载的信息可以是指该码块包括的比特位上承载的信息。本申请实施例中的码块也可以有其他可以替换的名称，比如可以替换为数据单元，或者替换为Flit，其中，Flit在一些场景下可以翻译为微片。需要注意的是，本申请实施例中一些使用码块为例进行介绍的实施例同样也适用于Flit的场景。
本申请实施例中的码块可以包括两大类型，分别为数据类型的码块和控制类型的码块。数据类型的码块中的比特可以用于承载实际的数据有效载荷，控制类型的码块中的比特可以用于承载控制信息。
控制类型的码块下还可以划分出多种类型的码块，例如：头码块、尾码块、空闲码块、操作维护管理码块、错误码块、低功耗码块等等。
图2a示例性示出了标准中定义的64B/66B编码格式的码块的结构示意图，如图2a所示，该码块为IEEE Std 802.3-2018.IEEE Standard for Ethenet SECTION SIX标准所定义。如图2a所示，码块的同步头区域包括码块的第0比特和第1比特，码块的同步头区域有两种情况，分别为01和10。同步头为01的码块称为数据码块，数据码块可以写为D码块；同步头为10的称为控制码块。控制码块的字段D0占用8比特，可以称为控制码块的类型域(类型域可以写为type域)。
控制码块可以包括：头码块、尾码块、Ordered set码块(也可以写为O码块)、空闲码块(空闲码块也可以写为IDLE码块)、错误码块(错误码块也可以写为error码块)、低功耗码块等。本申请实施例中头码块为图2a中同步头为10类型与为0x78的码块，可以写为S码块。本申请实施例中尾码块可以写为T码块，包括图2a中同步头为10，类型域为0x87、0x99、0xAA、0xB4、0xCC、0xD2、0xE1和0xFF的码块。本申请实施例中O码块为图2a中同步头为10类型与为0x4B的码块。本申请实施例中可以将控制码块中除S码块和T码块之外的控制码块写为C码块。
图2b示例性示出了空闲码块的结构形式，图2c示例性示出了错误码块的结构形式，图2d示例性示出了低功耗码块的结构形式。如图2b、图2c和图2d所示，空闲码块、错误码块和低功耗码块的同步头区域都为10，其它内容如图所示。本申请实施例中所涉及到的码块以图2a所示的码块结构形式为例进行示例性说明，但本申请实施例也适用于其它标准所定义的码块形式，比如8B/10B，256B/257B等。
(2)码块序列。
本申请实施例中将以码块为单位组成的一串数据流称为码块序列，比如本申请实施例中涉及到的第一码块序列、第二码块序列等。本申请实施例中的码块序列也可以有其他名称，比如叫码块流等，本申请实施例中不对名称进行具体限制。
本申请实施例中的“第一码块序列”、“第二码块序列”、“第三码块序列”和“第四码块序列”中的一个码块序列，码块序列中的一段连续的码块的形式可能有多种，比如 下面所示例的：
…SDDDD…
…DDDDD…
…DDDT…
…DDDTI…
…TIIISDDD..
…TOS…
…TIOS…
在以上示例中S表示头码块，D表示数据码块，T表示尾码块，I表示空闲码块，O表示O码块。上述示例可以看出，本申请实施例中的码块序列可能包括的码块类型可以为多种，比如S码块、D码块和T码块，再比如还包括有I码块、O码块等。中对一个码块的具体数量不做限制，仅仅是列举了本申请实施例中一个码块序列中的一段连续的码块可能有的存在形式。
(3)灵活以太网协议的帧格式。
以FlexE一个时隙粒度5Gbps的通道为大颗粒管道进行介绍，需要说明是，本申请实施例中一个大颗粒管道的带宽不限于5Gbps，比如也可以为6Gbps、7Gbps等。
图2e示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种灵活以太网协议的帧格式的结构示意图，前述图1d中发送端121输出的码块序列1211中的帧格式可以为灵活以太网协议的帧格式，如图2e所示，基于灵活以太网协议可以物理端口的传输构建固定帧格式，并进行基于时分复用(Time Division Multiplexing，TDM)的时隙划分。对于100GE PHY端口，数据码块序列可以由以20为周期的64B/66B码块组成，对应20个时隙，每个时隙带宽为5Gbps，称为一个时隙(slot)。
如图2e所示，灵活以太网可以基于64B/66B码块构建的时分复用帧结构。FlexE每个PHY上的数据通过周期性插入FlexE开销(OH)的码块来实现对齐，比如可以是每隔1023x 20个66B的净荷数据码块插入1个66B的开销码块FlexE OH。
如图2e所示，8行(每行包括1个OH的码块+1023x 20数据(Data))的66B码块构成一个灵活以太网协议下的协议帧(协议帧也可以称为基本帧、基帧、单帧等，英文可以写为basic frame、single frame等等，可以根据实际需要选择名称，本申请实施例对名称不做具体限定。需要说明的是，这里的帧可以不是指以太网的媒体访问控制(Medium Access Control，MAC)帧，而是一段数据码流，有着特定格式)。如图2e所示。32个灵活以太网协议下的协议帧构成一个灵活以太网协议下的复帧。本申请实施例中的复帧的英文也可以写为multi frame，可以根据实际需要选择名称，本申请实施例对名称不做具体限定。
一种可能的实施方案中，在灵活以太网协议下的协议帧的第一个OH码块中，0-7比特位的0x 4B字段和32-35比特位的0x 5字段共同构成FlexE帧开销码块的帧头指示标记字段。FlexE OH中可以定义OH中定义了两个管理通道，管理通道可以用于运行基于64B/66B码块序列编码的1.2Mb/s和1.8Mb/s的两个以太网协议的管理、OAM通信链路。进一步，本申请实施例中可以在100GE物理层的场景采取的是64B/66B编码。
ITU-T MTN重用FlexE帧结构，所以其帧结构与之相同。
(4)灵活小颗粒(fine granularity basic unit，fgBU)帧格式。
本申请实施例中对一个大颗粒管道进行划分，可以得到至少两个小颗粒管道。一个小颗粒管道的带宽小于该小颗粒管道所属的大颗粒管道的带宽。本申请实施例中以一个大颗粒管道为5Gbps，一个小颗粒管道为10Mbps为例进行示意性说明。两个大颗粒管道对应的带宽可以相等，也可以不等。一个大颗粒管道划分得到的任意两个小颗粒管道的带宽可以相等也可以不等。为了更清楚的介绍本申请实施例，后续内容以每个大颗粒管道的带宽均为5Gbps，每个小颗粒管道均为10Mbps为例进行说明。一个大颗粒管道对应的一个时隙可以划分为480个子时隙，进一步可以建立该480个子时隙与小颗粒业务的对应关系，进而可以根据该对应关系对各个小颗粒业务的数据进行复用。
图2f示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种灵活小颗粒帧(fine granularity basic unit，fgBU)格式。大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列是对多个小颗粒管道上的数据进行复用后得到的，即大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列411中的帧格式即可以称为fgBU帧格式。如图2f所示，大颗粒管道40划分为480个小颗粒管道401，一个小颗粒管道对应一个子时隙，根据子时隙和小颗粒业务的对应关系，对各个小颗粒业务进行复用，得到复用后的码块序列(图中示意为大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列)。
对小颗粒业务进行复用后的码块序列中包括至少一个复帧，其中一个复帧包括20个基本帧(如图2f中的基本帧0至基本帧19)，一个基本帧中包括24个子时隙资源。一个复帧可以包括一个大颗粒管道的所有的480个子时隙资源。本申请实施例中的基本帧也可以称为小颗粒基本单元(Fine Granularity Basic Unit，fgBU)、小颗粒基帧。
如图2f所示，基本帧的帧结构可以为1个S码块+195个D码块+1个T码块构成，其总长度为197个66b码块。其中，S码块后的第一个数据码块中承载开销信息，且可承载开销信息的位置共有7*8bit＝56bit。其中，在单个基本帧包括的24个子时隙资源中，一个子时隙资源上可以传输8个65比特的码块。
(6)小颗粒管道承载的数据对应的帧结构中用于承载开销信息的码块结构。
图2g示例性示出了一种图2f的帧结构中用于承载开销信息的码块结构示意图，如图2g所示，其中在5Gbps管道下，一个复帧中包括20个基本帧，每个基本帧中的S码块后的第一个数据码块可以用于承载开销信息，一个复帧中可以有20个用于承载开销信息的码块。其中，一个码块上的开销(开销可以为Overhead，可以简写为OH)信息可以占用56bits，其中保留位(reserve，RES)为2bits；复帧指示(Multi-Frame-Indication，MFI)使用6bits(5Gbps管道下使用:0～19，余下取值保留。余下48bits中，使用type类型进行区分通用通信信道(Generic communication channel，GCC)和带宽调整，其中type类型为2bits。当type＝0b11时，表示后面的字段用于GCC通信；当type＝0b00时，表示后面的字段承载带宽调整信息。当然，这些字段也可以用作其他用途。
(7)小颗粒业务和子时隙的对应关系表。
图2h示例性示出了一种可能地小颗粒业务和子时隙的对应关系表的示意图，如图2h所示，一个5Gbps时隙可以划分为480个子时隙，分别为子时隙0至子时隙479。可以根据业务的带宽需求为业务分配该480个子时隙中的时隙资源。比如图2h中为业务编号为0x444的业务分配子时隙0和子时隙477。再比如图2h中为业务编号为0x010的业务分配子时隙1。
本申请实施例中的业务可以理解为client，或者称为客户，由于业务占用的带宽较小，可以称为小颗粒业务或小颗粒客户等名称。业务编号同样可以理解为业务的标识、客户标识或者client的标识等，或者理解为业务的索引号，只要可以用于指示出该业务即可。本申 请实施例无论子时隙还是时隙，均属于时隙资源，英文名字可以写为slot。本申请实施例总的子时隙索引号或时隙索引号均可以理解为时隙资源的标识，用于指示出该时隙资源。
基于上述内容，图3a示例性示出了一种可能地通信方法的流程示意图，该方法适用于第一通信设备和第二通信设备，其中第一通信设备和第二通信设备可以为前述图1a所示的通信设备以101、中间节点110、中间节点111、中间节点112和通信设备二102中的任两个节点。为了更清楚的介绍本申请实施例，后续内容以第一通信设备为图1c中的发送端121，第二通信设备为图1c中的接收端122为例进行示例性说明。如图3a所示，该方法包括：
步骤S3001，第一通信设备发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
相对应地，第二通信设备接收第一请求消息。
一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备在发送第一请求消息之前可以确定需要调整用于承载第二码块序列的管道的带宽。比如，第一通信设备在发送第一请求消息之前可以接收到网管下发的管道带宽的调整信息。一种可能地实施方式中，当第一通信设备确定需要增大用于承载第二码块序列的管道的带宽时，可以增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；当第一通信设备确定需要减小用于承载第二码块序列的管道的带宽时，可以减少第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
举个例子，第一通信设备在发送第一请求消息之前接收到网管装置下发的：将用于承载第二码块序列的管道的带宽从5Gbps增大为10Gbps。若一个5Gbps划分为480个时隙资源，则可以确定增大后的带宽包括960个时隙资源，若一个基本帧中包括有24个时隙资源，则可以确定出需将一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量从20个增大为40个。
一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备可以将具体调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量指示给第二通信设备。又一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备也可以不将调整后的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量指示给第二通信设备，而是由网管装置向第二通信设备下发管道带宽的调整信息，从而第一通信设备和第二通信设备各自均遵循一定的规则，确定出调整后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量。
本申请实施例中，用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的信息也可以是：用于指示请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的时隙资源数量的信息，或者为用于指示请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧的长度的信息。
步骤S3002，第二通信设备发送第一响应消息，第一响应消息用于指示允许第一请求消息请求的内容。
相对应地，第一通信设备接收第一响应消息。
第一响应消息也可以称为OK消息或者ACK消息。本申请实施例中OK消息也可以写为确认消息，本申请实施例中ACK消息也可以写为确认消息。
步骤S3003，第一通信设备发送第一确认消息，第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容。
相对应地，第二通信设备接收第一确认消息。
第一确认消息可以称为Do it消息或者称为CMT消息。本申请实施例中Do it消息也可以写为执行消息，本申请实施例中CMT消息也可以写为执行消息。
在一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备可以发送3次Do it消息，在3个Do it消息 之后的码块序列中的下一个复帧边界起始，变更第二码块序列中复帧的长度(也可以理解为根据第一请求消息采用调整后复帧中包括的基本帧的数量生成复帧)。
相对应地，第二通信设接收到3次Do it消息后，在接收到的下一个复帧中，基于调整后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量对其进行解复用。
需要说明的是，上述步骤S3002和步骤S3003中的一个或多个步骤不是必须的。
步骤S3004，第一通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列；
步骤S3005，第一通信设备发送第二码块序列。
相对应地，第二通信设备接收第二码块序列。
步骤S3006，第二通信设备从第二码块序列中解复用出Q1个第一码块序列。
其中，S1个时隙资源中的一个时隙资源可以为本申请实施例中提到的子时隙，也可以为时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，比如下述内容中的S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙时的示例。在又一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个第一码块序列有可能为大颗粒管道的序列，这种情况下，Q1条第一码块序列中的一条第一码块序列可能是对多个客户的业务数据进行复用得到的，因此这种情况下，Q1个客户与Q1个第一码块序列之间不再是一一对应关系。本申请实施例中S1和Q1均为正整数。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的时隙资源本质上也是时隙资源，之所以称之为时隙资源，是为了与后续其他实施例中的时隙进行区分而称呼的。本申请实施例提供的步骤S3001至步骤S3006的方案，可以适用于仅有一级复用的应用场景中，也可以应用于有多级复用的场景中。图3b示例性示出了一种数据传输方案的效果图，图3c示例性示出了应用本申请实施例提供的方案后的数据传输方案效果图，下面结合图3b和图3c对本申请实施例的有益效果进行介绍：
在实际应用中，会存在一些需要增大业务带宽的场景，如图3b所示，在带宽增大前，若管道91用于承载业务90的数据，管道91的带宽假设为5Gbps(管道带宽也可以是其他值，比如100Gbps，或者10Mbps等等)，现在将用于承载业务90的管道的带宽增大，比如可以新增管道93，管道93的带宽也假设为5Gbps。一种可能地情况下，比如管道92与管道93并未处于同一个被绑定的端口中，这种情况下，虽然用于承载业务90的管道的带宽增大了，但是业务90也无法使用管道93中的带宽。而应用本申请实施例提供的方案，由于可以对复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行调整，也可以说对该码块序列中的复帧的长度进行调整，从而可以如图3c所示，将原管道92和增大的管道93融合为一个带宽为10Gbps的管道94，即用于承载业务90的管道94的带宽从5Gbps增大为10Gbps。
要说明的是，本申请实施例中提供的方案中可以调整一个码块序列中的复帧的长度，该码块序列可以是对小颗粒管道上的码块进行复用后得到的码块序列，也可以是对大颗粒管道上的码块进行复用后的得到的码块序列。当然也可以用于其他需要进行管道带宽增加的场景，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
为了更加清楚的介绍本申请实施例提供的方案，下面以S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙为例进行介绍。当S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙时，图3a的各个步骤中的时隙资源可以 理解为子时隙。
下面先介绍四个带宽，分别为：a1-小颗粒业务的带宽、a2-小颗粒管道的带宽、a3-用于承载小颗粒业务的小颗粒管道的总带宽，及a4-大颗粒管道的带宽。图4示例性示出了本申请实施例中提到的4种类型的带宽的示意图，结合图4进行说明。
a1-小颗粒业务的带宽。
小颗粒业务的带宽为小颗粒业务本身具有的速率特性，比如9Mbps。小颗粒业务的带宽也可以理解为小颗粒业务信号带宽。
a2-小颗粒管道的带宽。
小颗粒管道的带宽也可以称为小颗粒通道的带宽，可以是指用来承载小颗粒业务的以10Mbps为单位的带宽，比如对于9Mbps的小颗粒业务，小颗粒通道提供一个10Mbps的带宽进行承载；对于一个28Mbps的小颗粒业务，小颗粒通道提供3个10Mbps，即30Mbps的带宽来进行承载。
a3-用于承载小颗粒业务的小颗粒管道的总带宽。
用于承载小颗粒业务的小颗粒管道的总带宽也可以称为小颗粒管道fgBU-n带宽，或者称小颗粒管道fgBU-n总带宽，是指用来承载所有小颗粒通道带宽所用的总带宽，比如480个10Mbps小颗粒通道时，小颗粒管道fgBU-n为fgBU-20，对应标称带宽为4.8Gbps，实际带宽为5Gbps。当使用2个5Gbps时隙来承载时，小颗粒管道fgBU-n为fgBU-40，带宽为10Gbps。
a4-大颗粒管道的带宽。
大颗粒管道也可以称为大颗粒通道，大颗粒管道的带宽可以是指用来承载小颗粒管道fgBU-n带宽的管道带宽，比如使用一个5Gbps时隙来承载小颗粒管道fgBU-n，则对应大颗粒通道带宽为5Gbps；当使用2个5Gbps时隙来承载时，对应大颗粒通道带宽为10Gbps。
本申请实施例提供的方案可以让控制面简化。控制面可以仅分别下发大颗粒通道带宽变化的调整，以及小颗粒通道带宽变化的调整。具体实现过程，可以由数据面进行协商。网管可以下发大颗粒管道的和/或小颗粒管道的带宽调整信息，本申请实施例提供的方案可以在数据面方面提供平滑可行的联动调整方式。数据面操作的核心思路可以参考如下内容。
如图4所示，该4个带宽存在带宽嵌套的关系，当需要对用于承载小颗粒业务的通道的带宽进行增大时，需要遵循一定的变化顺序，比如图4所示，可以沿着从右至左的方向进行增大。具体来说：可以将承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒通道带宽进行增大。需要先增大用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽，之后可以增大用于承载小颗粒业务的小颗粒管道的总带宽(即将承载在增大后的大颗粒通道中的小颗粒管道fgBU-n进行增大)(本申请实施例中fgBU-n的增大是指码块序列中一个复帧中对应的子时隙资源增多，或者也可以说该码块序列中一个复帧的长度增长)。可选地，进一步，在fgBU-n增大之后还可以再增大小颗粒通道带宽，可选地，之后还可以再将业务信号实际带宽增大。按照一定的顺序调整带宽，则可以实现大小颗粒管道无损带宽调整，假如带宽变化的过程中四种带宽的变化顺序出现了问题，极容易导致客户业务受损。
当需减小大颗粒管道带宽时，则也需要遵循一定的变化顺序，比如可以依据图4中从左至右的4个带宽的顺序进行减小。比如，可以先对业务信号的带宽进行减小(该步骤可选)，之后再对小颗粒管道的带宽进行减小(该步骤可选)，接着可以将小颗粒管道fgBU-n中的时隙进行集中和整理，之后再对fgBU-n带宽减小(该步骤可以理解为本申请实施例中将码块序列种一个复帧的长度缩短，或者说将码块序列中一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量 减少，或者说将码块序列中一个复帧中包括的子时隙的资源减少)，之后再进行大颗粒管道的带宽减小。按照一定的顺序调整带宽，则可以实现大小颗粒管道无损带宽调整，若顺序颠倒了，则会导致小颗粒管道带宽受损，从而也会导致客户业务受损。从以上增大和减小流程中可以看出，大小颗粒联动无损调整方案中，需要重新定义的新步骤是小颗粒管道fgBU-n的增大和减小，即其所包含的时隙个数和复帧长度的变化，和小颗粒管道fgBU-n中时隙的集中和整理。整体来看，需要重新定义对小颗粒管道fgBU-n的调整。
基于图4示出的应用场景，图5a示例性示出了图3a中的步骤S3005和S3006的又一种可能地实施方式的流程示意图，如图5a所示，步骤S3005具体包括以下内容：
步骤S30051，第一通信设备根据调整后复帧中的子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，将第二码块序列和第三码块序列复用，得到第四码块序列；
步骤S30052，第一通信设备发送第四码块序列。
相对应地，第二通信设备接收第四码块序列。
如图5a所示，步骤S3006具体包括以下内容：
步骤S30061，第二通信设备根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧中子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列。
步骤S30062，根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个子时隙，以及S1个子时隙中子时隙与Q1个客户的对应关系，对第二码块序列解复用，得到Q1个客户对应的Q1个第一码块序列。
S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。S1和Q1均为正整数。
图5b为一种数据传输方案的效果图，图5c示例性示出了一种应用图5a所示的方法后的一种可能的效果示意图，下面结合图5b和图5c对本申请实施例的一种可能地有益效果进行介绍：
图5b示例性示出了一种用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大后的数据传输方案的示意图，如图5b所示，在带宽增大前，若只有一个大颗粒管道40用于承载小颗粒业务，其余19个大颗粒管道均用于承载大颗粒业务(一个大颗粒管道划分了20个小颗粒管道)。现基于某种需要，将用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大为5Gbps的两倍，或者说将另一个大颗粒管道也用于承载小颗粒业务。比如图5b中，将大颗粒管道50也用于承载小颗粒业务，其上包括480个小颗粒管道501。
一种可能地的方案中，虽然用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大了，比如增大为10Gbps，但是由于对小颗粒业务复用后的码块序列中的一个复帧中仅可以携带480个子时隙的数据，虽然用于承载小颗粒业务的小颗粒管道数量增大为980，但是对于占用大颗粒管道40中的子时隙的小颗粒业务(比如图5b中的小颗粒业务2)来说，无法占用额外增加的480个子时隙中的子时隙(即大颗粒管道50中的480个子时隙)。对于小颗粒业务2来说，若当前大颗粒管道40中的子时隙已经被分配完毕，则即使用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大了，小颗粒业务2对应的带宽也无法再进一步增大了。
为了解决该问题，本申请实施例提供了一种解决方案，本申请实施例中可以根据用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽，对小颗粒业务复用后码块序列中复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行调整，也可以说对该码块序列中的复帧的长度进行调整，从而当用于承载小 颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大的情况下，即使带宽增大前该大颗粒管道的子时隙资源已经被占用完毕，小颗粒业务的带宽也依然可以进一步被增大。应用本申请实施例提供的方案的技术效果可以参见图5c所示：
图5c示例性示出了应用本申请实施例在用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大后的数据传输方案的示意图，如图5c所示，在带宽增大前，一个大颗粒管道70(此时大颗粒管道70的带宽为5Gbps)用于承载小颗粒业务，其余19个大颗粒管道均用于承载大颗粒业务。现基于某种需要，将用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道70的带宽增大为5Gbps的两倍，时隙资源也占用2个，其余18个大颗粒管道仍然用于承载大颗粒业务，这种情况下，大颗粒管道70上可以包括的小颗粒管道的数量为980个(包括480个小颗粒管道401，以及480个小颗粒管道501)。
相比图5b的方案，在图5c中，可以从980个子时隙中为小颗粒业务1和小颗粒业务2分配子时隙，因此，对于小颗粒业务2来说，若当前大颗粒管道40中的子时隙已经被分配完毕，若用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的带宽增大，则小颗粒业务2对应的带宽也可以进一步增大。
上述图5b中带宽增大后大颗粒管道40对应的子时隙和业务的对应关系可以参见前述图2h所示。图5d中示例性示出了图5c中带宽增大后大颗粒管道70对应的一种小颗粒业务和子时隙的对应关系表的示意图，如图5d所示，大颗粒管道70的10Gbps时隙可以划分为960子时隙，分别为子时隙0至子时隙959。即该大颗粒管道中的子时隙进行统一编号。图5d中为业务编号为0x444的业务分配子时隙0和子时隙959。本申请实施例中通过图5d示例性示出了本申请实施例调整后的子时隙和客户的对应关系表。由于本申请实施例中对该表格进行了调整，将该表格中子时隙的数量增大为960个。因此第一通信设备在后续生成复帧时，由于一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备在生成复帧时，只有将该表格中的所有子时隙的数据承载完毕后才算一个复帧的结束，而一个基本帧中能够承载的子时隙的数量又是预设的，比如预设的固定值24个子时隙，因此由于本申请实施例中将该表格中子时隙的数量增多了，因此后续生成的复帧中的基本帧的数量也随之增多。该表格中子时隙数量减少时，一个复帧中基本帧数量随之减少，理由与之类似，不再赘述。
上述图5b中带宽增大后大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列的帧格式可以参见前述图2f中的内容。图5e示例性示出了图5c中大颗粒管道70输出的码块序列的帧格式。如图5e所示，该码块序列711中一个复帧可以包括40个基本帧，每个基本帧包括24个子时隙对应的业务数据，即一个复帧可以承载960个子时隙(如图5d中所示的956个子时隙)上对应的业务的数据。
在图5a所示的方法中，在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二码块序列中调整后的复帧包括第一数量的基本帧，第一数量大于数量阈值，数量阈值与一个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关。一种可能地实施方式中，第一数量与：N2个时隙划分的子时隙的数量，以及一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量相关。N2为正整数。其中，N2为Q1个客户对应的子时隙所属时隙的总数量。一种可能地实施方式中，数量阈值为：一个时隙划分的子时隙的总数量，与一个基本帧中包括的数据对应的子时隙的数量的商。一种可能地实施方式中，N2个时隙中任意两个时隙中的子时隙的数量相等。第一数量的值等于数量阈值的N2倍。图5c和图5e中是以数量阈值为20，第一数量为40，N2为2进行举例的。
需要说明的是，当采用图5e中的帧结构传输第二码块序列，则第二码块序列中的一个复帧中包括40个基本帧，一个复帧中可以有40个用于承载开销信息的码块。其中，一个码块上的开销可以如前述图2g所示，与图2g不同的是，复帧指示(Multi-Frame-Indication，MFI)使用6bits，10Gbps管道下使用：0～39，余下取值保留。
从图5b、图5c和图5e可以看出，图5b中一个第二码块序列(比如为大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列)中仅仅可以用于承载小颗粒管道401上承载的业务。而图5c所示的方案中，一个第二码块序列(比如为大颗粒管道40输出的码块序列)可以用于承载小颗粒管道4701和小颗粒管道501上承载的业务。而大颗粒管道70可以对应两个时隙，这种情况下，一种可能地实施方式中，Q1个客户中包括第一客户和第二客户。第一客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第一时隙(比如可以是大颗粒管道40对应的时隙)划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。第二客户对应的至少一个子时隙为对第二时隙(比如可以是大颗粒管道50对应的时隙)划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个。
再举个例子用于说明本申请实施例提供的方案的有益效果，如图5c所示，若有3个3.3Gbps的小颗粒业务，在图5b所示的方案中，则仅仅可以在大颗粒管道40中分配一个3.3Gbps的小颗粒业务，在大颗粒管道50上分配一个3.3Gbps的小颗粒业务，第三个3.3Gbps的小颗粒业务只能放在其他用于承载大颗粒业务的大颗粒管道中，大颗粒管道的带宽为5Gbps，由此会带了承载效率较低的问题。而在本申请实施例提供的图5c所示的方案中，则由于大颗粒管道70的带宽为10Gbps，因此，可以将3个3.3Gbps的小颗粒业务均承载于大颗粒管道70的上，从而可以提高数据传输过程中的承载效率。
基于上述内容，下面分别介绍本申请实施例中定义的信令(比如第一请求消息，以及后续内容中将提到的第二请求消息)的格式。本申请实施例中的第一请求消息和/或第二请求消息可以承载于第二码块序列中的一个复帧中的：用于承载的开销信息的码块上。该码块可以为复帧包括的基本帧中S码块之后的第一个数据码块。
图6a示例性示出了一种第二码块序列中复帧上用于承载开销信息的码块的结构示意图，如图6a所示，MFI＝？表示该码块可能为一个复帧中的任一个基本帧中的码块。如图6a所示，将该码块的type字段后的10比特至55比特划分为以下字段，各字段定义如下：
类型(Type)字段后的6bit为操作码(operation，OP)字段，其中有2bit的保留(RES)字段。
在OP字段中：
DD字段：占用1bit(本申请实施例中bit表示比特)，当该字段被置1，可以表示从下游向上游发，可以表示downstream done；比如，可以表示下游节点指示上游节点开始进行带宽增大调整；
CMT字段：占用1bit,当该字段的比特位被置为1可以表示开始做某件事；比如可以表示时隙调整开始(calendar configuration commit)；
REQ字段：占用1bit，当该字段的比特位被置为1可以表示请求；比如可以表示时隙调整请求(calendar configuration request)；
ACK字段：占用1bit，当该字段的比特位被置为1可以表示响应；比如可以表示时隙调整响应(calendar configuration acknowledge)；
时隙号(fgSlot Number)字段:占用12bits，表示目的操作时隙号(时隙号也可以理解 为时隙资源的标识，或者时隙资源的索引号)(本申请实施例中时隙号字段也可以称为fgSlot Number字段，本申请实施例提及的fgSlot Number位置是指fgSlot Number字段对应的比特位)；
客户号(fgClient ID)字段:占用12bits,可以承载目的操作时隙号对应的客户的标识(客户的标识也可以理解为业务的标识、客户的索引号等)，用于表示该目的操作时隙号对应的时隙资源被分配的客户的标识(Identification，ID)；
保留(RES)字段：占用9bits,保留字段(本申请实施例中保留字段也可以称为RES字段)；
循环冗余校验(Cyclic Redundancy Check，CRC)字段：占用7比特，用于承载前述51bits的校验值。
一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中：用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的指示信息承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的时隙表配置表字段；或者，第一码块的时隙配置表字段下的OP code字段。
又一种可能地实施方式中，第一请求消息中：用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的指示信息可以承载于以下内容中的至少一项：第一码块的9比特至12比特；或者，第一码块的37比特至40比特。
下面通过几种实施方式分别对其进行介绍：实施方式A1用于介绍第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况。实施方式A2用于介绍第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况。
实施方式A1，第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。这种情况下第一请求消息也可以称为增大消息，增大消息也可以称为enlarge消息。
基于图6a所示的内容，图6b示例性示出了一种可能的enlarge消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图，如图6b所示，可以通过op字段的4比特用于区分各个消息，比如图6b所示：
enlarge消息的格式中：OP字段设置为1100；当第二通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的1100确认该消息为enlarge消息，即该消息用于请求增大第二码块序列中的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
enlarge消息对应的OK消息中：OP字段设置为0001；当第一通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的0001确认该消息为OK消息，即确认第二通信设备允许第一通信设备所发送的第一请求消息所请求的内容；
enlarge消息对应的Do it消息中：OP字段设置为0100；一种可能地实施方式中，当第二通信设备收到三条Do it消息后，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容，即在下一个第二码块序列中的复帧中即基于调整后复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行解复用。
如图6b所示，enlarge消息中的fgClient ID字段可以填充保留的客户号，fgSlot Number位置可以填写增大后的时隙最大的编号(5Gbps大颗粒管道增大为10Gbps后，子时隙数从480个变成了960个。960个子时隙的编号可以为0～959)。但值得注意的是，enlarge消息中本质上最重要的是OP code指示，fgClient ID字段和fgSlot Number字段可以不填，也可以填充其他信息值，图示内容非必须。
如图6b所示，第一请求消息中还可以包括用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息。举个例子，10Gbps管道960个10Mbps 子时隙，Slot Number＝0(0x000),1(0x001)，…959(0x3BF)。可以将fgSlot number#字段设置为0x3BF，用于表示调整后的第二码块序列中一个复帧包括的子时隙的最大索引号为959。
用于指示第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号的指示信息为以下内容中的一项：
第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的最大索引号；
第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量；
第二码块序列中调整后复帧中承载的数据对应的子时隙的总数量和修正值的计算结果。
其中，修正值为0或1。举个例子，以0开始计数，则960个子时隙中的最大索引号为959，此时，959是根据960-1得到的，其中，1即为修正值。
实施方式A2，第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。这种情况下第一请求消息也可以称为减小消息，减小消息也可以称为shrink消息。
基于图6a所示的内容，图6c示例性示出了一种可能的shrink消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图，如图6c所示，可以通过op字段的4比特用于区分各个消息，比如图6c所示：
shrink消息的格式中：OP字段设置为0011；当第二通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的0011确认该消息为shrink消息，即该消息用于请求减小第二码块序列中的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
shrink消息对应的OK消息中：OP字段设置为0001；当第一通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的0001确认该消息为OK消息，即确认第二通信设备允许第一通信设备所发送的第一请求消息所请求的内容；
shrink消息对应的Do it消息中：OP字段设置为0100；一种可能地实施方式中，当第二通信设备收到三条Do it消息后，启用第一请求消息所请求的内容，即在下一个第二码块序列中的复帧中即基于调整后复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行解复用。
如图6c所示，shrink消息中的fgClient ID字段可以填充保留的客户号，fgSlot Number字段可以填写管道带宽调整后的最小子时隙或最大子时隙的编号(比如，将用于承载小颗粒业务的带宽从10Gbps减少为5Gbps，则子时隙的总数量从960减少到480)。但值得注意的是，shrink消息中本质上最重要的是OP code指示，fgClient ID字段和fgSlot Number字段可以不填，也可以填充其他信息值，图示内容非必须。
本申请实施例中，当对第二码块序列中的一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行调整，即对复帧中可以包括的子时隙的数量进行了调整，相当于增多或减少了用于承载小颗粒业务的子时隙的数量。在一种可能地实施方式中，在启用更新后的复帧中的基本帧的数量生成第二码块序列之前，第一通信设备可以对客户和子时隙的关系进行调整，具体来说可以将Q1个客户与S2个子时隙的对应关系，调整为：Q1个客户与S1个子时隙的对应关系。其中，S2个子时隙为第二码块序列中调整前复帧中的基本帧对应的子时隙。S2为正整数。
一种可能地实施方式中，第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间可以遵循相同的调整策略，各自对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行整理。又一种可能地实施方式中，可以由第一通信设备对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行整理，并将整理后的对应关系下发给第二通信设备，可以是全量下发给第二通信设备(该方案将在后续内容再进行介绍，此处先不描述)。
一种可能地实施方式中，上述第一请求消息可以表示调整一个复帧中基本帧的数量，还可以指示第二通信设备对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行整理。这种情况下，第二通信设备可以在整理了子时隙和客户的对应关系后再回复第一响应消息，而第一通信设备也可以在整理了子时隙和客户的对应关系，且收到第一响应消息后，再回复第一确认消息。
又一种可能地实施方式中，上述第一请求消息可以仅表示用于调整一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量，这种情况下，还可以发送第二请求消息，第二通信设备接收第二请求消息，第二请求消息用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系。在一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备接收到第二请求消息后，还可以发送第二请求消息对应的第二响应消息，第一通信设备在接收到第二响应消息后还可以发送第二响应消息对应的第二确认消息。
在第一请求消息用于请求增大第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之后发送，以使其先增大复帧中包括的基本帧的数量，之后再对调整后的复帧中包括的子时隙和客户的对应进行调整。在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：第二请求消息在第一请求消息之前发送，如此，可以先通过对子时隙和客户的对应关系的调整，将需要被删除的子时隙上的业务移走，以防止由于子时隙的减少而导致的业务受损。
举个例子，当用于承载小颗粒业务的带宽从10Gbps降为5Gbps时，对应的子时隙个数需要从960降为480个。在子时隙数量进行实际改动之前，业务的时隙分配可能是分布在960个子时隙里的，所以需要对子时隙进行集中，即整理到要保留的那480个子时隙中。在子时隙集中和整理过程中，可能涉及到搬移的操作。相反地，当用于承载小颗粒业务的带宽从5Gbps增大为10Gbps时，对应的子时隙个数需要从480个变成960个，此时需要将新增的子时隙与原有的480个子时隙进行并存，需要考虑对应的放置方式，比如放置在原有480个子时隙的尾部，或间插到原有子时隙中间。
下面通过实施方式A3和实施方式A4对子时隙和客户关系进行调整的过程中的信令格式进行介绍。实施方式A3用于介绍发送用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系的第二请求消息的实施方式。实施方式A4用于介绍通过下发的R1个第一子请求消息下发子时隙和客户对应关系的实施方式。
实施方式A3，用于介绍发送用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系的第二请求消息的实施方式。第二请求消息也可以称为整理消息，整理消息也可以称为arrange消息，或者称为centralize消息。
基于图6a所示的内容，图6d示例性示出了一种可能的arrange消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图，如图6d所示，可以通过op字段的4比特用于区分各个消息，比如图6d所示：
arrange消息的格式中：OP字段设置为1110；当第二通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的1110确认该消息为arrange消息，即该消息用于请求整理第二码块序列中的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
arrange消息对应的OK消息中：OP字段设置为0001；当第一通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的0001确认该消息为OK消息，即确认第二通信设备允许第一通信设备所发送的第一请求消息所请求的内容；
arrange消息对应的Do it消息中：OP字段设置为0100；一种可能地实施方式中，当第二通信设备收到三条Do it消息后，启用第二请求消息所请求的内容，即在下一个第二码块序 列中的复帧中即基于更新后的客户和子时隙的对应关系进行解复用。
如图6d所示，arrange消息中的fgClient ID字段可以填充保留的客户号，fgSlot Number字段可以填写管道带宽调整后最大子时隙的编号(比如，将用于承载小颗粒业务的带宽从10Gbps减少为5Gbps，则子时隙的总数量从960减少到480)。但值得注意的是，arrange消息中本质上最重要的是OP code指示，fgClient ID字段和fgSlot Number字段可以不填，也可以填充其他信息值，图示内容非必须。
本申请实施例中还可以提供一种第一请求消息、第二请求消息以及相对应的OK消息和Do it消息的协议格式。在不增加实施例一OP code的基础上，通过使用保留位进行区分该3种握手协议以及带宽调整所使用的REQ，ACK，CMT等消息。具体地，Op code取值时，可以重用REQ的OP code,只是同时需要使用RES保留bit进行互相区分，或者是标识字段(本申请标识字段也可以称为flag字段)的比特(bit)值取其他值。
方式一：使用标识字段(flag字段)做协议区分：
1)标识字段(flag字段)取值为0b10时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第一请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第一响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第一确认消息)，表示协商增大一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
2)标识字段(flag字段)取值为0b01时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第一请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第一响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第一确认消息)，表示协商减小一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
3)标识字段(flag字段)取值为0b11时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第二请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第二响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第二确认消息)，表示协商对一个复帧中包括的子时隙和客户的对应关系进行调整。
方式二：使用RES(2bits或后面9bits)做协议区分：
1)RES取值为0b10时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第一请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第一响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第一确认消息)，表示协商增大一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
2)RES取值为0b01时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第一请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第一响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第一确认消息)，表示协商减小一个复帧中包括的基本帧的数量；
3)RES取值为0b11时，重用REQ字段(当该字段置1则表示第二请求消息)，ACK字段(当该字段置1则表示第二响应消息)，CMT字段(当该字段置1则表示第二确认消息)，表示协商对一个复帧中包括的子时隙和客户的对应关系进行调整。
实施方式A4，通过下发的R1个第一子请求消息下发子时隙和客户对应关系。在该实施方式中，第一通信设备对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行整理，并将整理后的对应关系下发给第二通信设备，可以是全量下发给第二通信设备。一个第一子请求消息可以称为全量时隙配置下发(full-configurationg，FC)消息，全量时隙配置下发消息也可以写为FC消息，或者写为FC请求消息。
前述实施方式A1-A3中可以让各个节点独立做子时隙个数和复帧长度的变化，以及子时隙的集中和整理。实施方式A4采用相邻两个节点间，接收侧跟随发送侧的方式，发送侧做相关配置，并通过协议握手同步给接收侧。
具体地，时隙资源的集中和整理让节点的发送侧单独做，完成之后，通过将整理后的全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系下发，实现小颗粒管道fgBU-n子时隙个数和复帧长度的变化。具体地，假如需要做小颗粒管道fgBU-n子时隙个数和复帧长度从10Gbps的960个时隙减小为5Gbps的480个时隙，本申请实施例中，发送侧可以先将有业务在使用的时隙整理到要保留的480个时隙中去，整理完成后，发送侧将整理后的480个时隙通过本申请实施例定义R1个第一子请求消息(也可以称为时隙配置全量下发的消息)发送给下游节点的接收侧。下游节点接收完全部的480个时隙后，向上游节点的发送侧进行响应(R1个第一子请求消息对应的响应消息)。之后，上游节点的发送侧发送切换使能消息(R1个第一子请求消息对应的确认消息)，来使能这480个时隙。这样，通过时隙表的切换来完成时隙个数和复帧长度的减小。
本申请实施例中，R1为正整数。R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的S1个子时隙中的子时隙与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系。相对应地，第二通信设备接收到R1个第一子请求消息。
R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：用于指示第一子请求消息是否为R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。
在该可能地实施方式中，一种可能地实施方式中，第二通信设备可以在接收到所有FC消息后再发送OK消息。或者，也可以发送多个FC对应的第一子响应消息，比如接收到一个FC消息便回复一个第一子响应消息(也可以称为OK消息)，接收到R1个FC消息则回复R1个第一子响应消息。一个第一子响应消息用于指示允许第一子响应消息对应的第一子请求消息所请求的内容。
本申请实施例定义的全量时隙配置下发的协议握手方式中，相邻节点间，接受侧Rx可以跟随发送侧Tx发送过来的时隙配置，即接收侧接收发送侧发过来的时隙配置并在之后使之生效使用。其中，第一通信设备(可以是小颗粒节点)(发送侧)发送整个时隙配置对应的FC消息给第二通信设备(可以是小颗粒节点)(接收侧)，假如时隙配置中有480个时隙，则需要发送480个FC消息。接收侧收完480个FC消息后，在校验每个消息正确无误之后，可以回复ACK响应消息，表示已经全部正确收到并已经做好了切换使用的准备。第一通信设备接收到ACK消息后，会在小颗粒复帧的边界发送3个CMT消息表示在下一个复帧边界进行切换生效使用刚发送的时隙配置。CMT消息发送后，在下一个复帧边界，两个节点同时进行切换生效使能新配置。
基于图6a所示的内容，图6e示例性示出了一种可能的FC消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图，如图6e所示，可以通过op字段的4比特用于区分各个消息，比如图6e所示：
FC消息的格式中：OP字段设置为1010；当第二通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的1010确认该消息为FC消息；即该消息用于指示接收该FC消息中携带的客户和子时隙的对应关系，还可以指示请求在R1个FC消息发送完成后，启用更新后的子时隙和客户的对应关系，且调整后的复帧中的子时隙的数量；
FC消息对应的OK消息中：OP字段设置为0001；当第一通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的0001确认该消息为OK消息，即确认第二通信设备允许第一通信设备所发送的第一请求消息所请求的内容；
FC消息对应的Do it消息中：OP字段设置为0100；一种可能地实施方式中，当第二通信设备收到三条Do it消息后，启用R1个第一子请求消息所请求的内容，即在下一个第二码 块序列中的复帧中即基于更新后的客户和子时隙的对应关系，以及调整后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量进行解复用。
如图6e所示，FC消息中的fgClient ID字段可以填充当前FC消息中指示的子时隙号对应的客户号，fgSlot Number字段可以填写当前FC消息中指示的子时隙号。LE字段来指示是否是最后一个FC消息，当是最后一个，则LE字段取值为1，否则，取值为0。Total Num字段表示此次传输的总共子时隙个数，当其取值为n时，表示此次传输的时隙个数为n*96个。
基于图6a所示的内容，图6f示例性示出了又一种可能的FC消息、OK消息和Do it消息的格式示意图，如图6f所示，可以通过op字段的4比特用于区分各个消息，比如图6f所示：
标识字段(flag字段):与GCC Generic communication channel通道进行区分，取值为0b00表示为带宽相关操作的消息类型，0b11表示为GCC通道；
最后元素(LE)字段：LE为last Element的简写，最后元素字段承载的值用于指示是否为最后一个；取值为0表示不是最后一个，取值为1表示是最后一个(本申请实施例中的最后元素字段也可以称为LE字段)；
OP code字段：4bits,该4比特的取值需要与前述第一请求消息中的取值有所区别，即该字段的取值与小颗粒第一请求消息(也可以称为无损带宽调整消息)中的REQ字段，ACK字段，CMT字段，DD字段等进行区分；此处取值为0b1010，用于表示该消息为与小颗粒管道fgBU-n相关的子时隙和客户对应关系的调整消息；
fgClient ID字段:12bits,表示对应子时隙分配给的客户业务编号标识；0x001～0xFFE有效，0x000表示为无效客户号，0xFFF保留。
fgSlot Number#字段：12bits，表示目的操作子时隙号/子时隙索引；典型地，5Gbps管道480个10Mbps子时隙，fgSlot Number＝0(0x000),1(0x001)，…479(0x1DF)。10Gbps管道960个10Mbps子时隙，Slot Number＝0(0x000),1(0x001)，…959(0x3BF)。未来25Gbps扩展以此类推。管道2400个10Mbps子时隙，Slot Number＝0(0x000),1(0x001)，…2399(0x95F)。
Sub OP字段:3bits，指示该fgBU-n相关的子时隙和客户对应关系的调整消息(也可以称为在FC消息通道)中属于具体那种类型的消息，比如用于指示该消息是用于请求进行子时隙和客户对应关系进行调整的FC请求消息，还是为FC消息对应的OK消息，或者为FC消息对应的Do it消息，或者为其他消息；一种可能地实施方式中，当Sub oP＝0b100,表示该消息为FC请求消息(可以写为FC.REQ)，Sub oP＝0b010,表示该消息为FC消息对应的OK消息(可以写为FC.ACK)；Sub oP＝0b001,表示该消息为FC消息对应的Do it消息(可以写为FC.CMT)；
FgBU-n字段:6bits,指示小颗粒管道中子时隙个数和复帧长度，取值大于0。比如，当取值为0x04时，fgBU-4,表示第二码块序列复帧(当第二码块序列中的数据时通过对小颗粒业务对应的码块进行复用得到的，也可以称第二码块序列中的复帧为小颗粒复帧，该复帧中的基本帧也可以称为小颗粒基本帧)包括4个小颗粒基本帧fgBU,对应子时隙总数为24*4＝96个子时隙。当取值为0x14,fgBU-20,表示小颗粒复帧包括20个小颗粒基本帧fgBU,对应子时隙总数为24*20＝480个子时隙。
CRC字段：承载的值为对前述41bits的7比特CRC7校验和，可以由前41比特计算生成，含2比特标识字段(flag字段)、1比特保留字段及38比特子时隙重配置消息字段。以先发送的比特作为高比特进行计算。一种可能地CRC多项式：x 7+x 5+x 4+x 2+x+1，初始值为0。 CRC7结果[x6:x0]高位先发。
基于上述内容，从图6f中可以看出，FC消息(或者称为FC请求消息)的格式中：OP字段设置为1010，且40-47比特的sub op字段设置为100；当第二通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段1010，以及sub op字段设置为100确认该消息为FC消息；
FC消息对应的OK消息中：OP字段设置为1010，且40-47比特的sub op字段设置为101；当第一通信设备收到该开销信息，可以基于OP字段的1010，且sub op字段设置为101确认该消息为OK消息；
FC消息对应的Do it消息中：OP字段设置为1010，且40-47比特的sub op字段设置为001。
如图6f所示，FC消息中的fgClient ID字段可以填充当前FC消息中指示的子时隙号对应的客户号，fgSlot Number字段可以填写当前FC消息中指示的子时隙号。
通过实施方式A4中全量时隙配置下发的方式，由于时隙分配的动作都由发送端执行，因此可以避免多次的交互和两侧时隙的不一致的问题，进一步提高效率。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，一个大颗粒管道输出的码块序列在生成过程中，是根据小颗粒业务和该大颗粒管道对应的子时隙的对应表生成的，该码块序列中的一个复帧中包括该大颗粒管道对应的所有子时隙，也可以说该码块序列中一个复帧中用于承载该大颗粒管道划分出的所有子时隙对应的数据。本申请实施例中当接收侧接收到全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系后，根据子时隙和客户关系对各个第一码块序列进行交织，得到第二码块序列，第二码块序列中一个复帧中可以承载该更新后的全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系中的所有子时隙对应的数据，也就是说当接收端根据更新后的子时隙和客户的对应关系生成第二码块序列中的复帧后，由于本申请实施例中限定一个复帧中承载的子时隙的数量为输出第二码块序列的管道对应的所有子时隙的数量，因此复帧中包括的子时隙的数量会随着下发的全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系进行更新，即复帧中包括的基本帧的数量会随着下发的全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系进行更新。也可以理解为全量的子时隙和客户的对应关系的下发除了用于指示更新后的子时隙和客户的对应关系，还用于指示更新后的复帧中包括的基本帧的数量。
基于上述内容，本申请实施例中还提供以下几种子时隙和客户的对应关系的调整策略。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中部分内容是以S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙为例进行介绍的，而本申请实施例提供的方案同样也可以适用于S个时隙资源为S1个时隙的情况。比如下述的调整策略，其它内容不再一一列举。
为了更清楚的介绍调整策略，现在举一个具体的示例，调整前管道中包括的子时隙的总数量为S2，调整后管道中包括的子时隙的总数量为S1，客户的数量始终为Q1个，S1和S2均为正整数。
S2可能小于S1，比如，将用于承载小颗粒业务的管道的带宽从5Gbps调整为10Gbps，则S2为480，S1为960。
S2也可能等于S1，这种情况下子时隙的数量没有改变，但是有可能子时隙的位置进行了迁移，比如可以将用于承载小颗粒业务的一个5Gbps管道更换为另一个用于承载小颗粒业务的5Gbps管道。
S2可能大于S1，比如将用于承载小颗粒业务的管道的带宽从10Gbps调整为5Gbps，则S2为960，S1为480(这种情况下，网管装置或其他装置也会指示具体保留下来的子时隙为 哪些子时隙，比如可以是将子时隙0至子时隙479保留(一个子时隙被保留的意思是指该子时隙仍然用于承载Q1个客户中的小颗粒业务)，而将子时隙480至子时隙959删除(一个子时隙被删除的意思是指该子时隙不再用于承载该Q1个客户中的小颗粒业务，比如有可能将该缩减的5Gbps时隙资源用于承载大颗粒业务))。
下面基于上述示例介绍几种调整策略：
调整策略B1，根据第一预设规则建立Q1个客户中的客户与S1个子时隙中的子时隙的对应关系。
调整策略B1中相当于全量算法，即在目标管道中重新进行子时隙分配计算，所有子时隙与客户的对应关系均需重新计算。
调整策略B2，在第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下(即复帧中包括的子时隙的数量减少的情况下，比如从960子时隙减少为480个子时隙)：根据第二预设规则建立待删除子时隙中被占用子时隙对应的客户与待保留子时隙中的空闲子时隙的对应关系。
其中，待删除子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且子时隙并非调整后复帧对应的子时隙。
待保留子时隙中的子时隙满足条件：子时隙为调整前复帧对应的子时隙，且为调整后复帧对应的子时隙。
调整策略B2可以理解为增量算法，即将待删除管道中的被占用子时隙对应的客户以增量的方式增加到待保留管道中去(仅部分子时隙对应的客户关系需要变动)。第一预设规则可以与第二预设规则相同，也可以不相同。
通过调整策略B2，找到待删除的管道和待保留的管道，按照先后顺序将待删除管道中的被占用子时隙对应的客户搬移到待保留管道中的空闲子时隙(部分动)，假如搬移前各个业务的子时隙分布是均匀的，删除某些业务后的时隙分布状态也是均匀的，那进行时隙搬移时，也能保证是均匀的。
调整策略B3，该策略中设置第一指针和第二指针。第一指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待保留子时隙中查找空闲子时隙，第二指针用于依据子时隙的排序从待删除子时隙中查找被占用子时隙。根据通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙的排序，将通过第二指针依序找到的被占用子时隙对应的客户关联至通过第一指针找到的空闲子时隙。调整策略B3也可以属于调整策略B2中的一种。
下面结合图7示例性示出的一种可能的子时隙与客户的对应关系的分布表，对该调整策略B3进行介绍，如图7所示，假如子时隙数量从960减少为480，则将960个子时隙按照图7结构进行放置，即将10Gbps大颗粒通道带宽分为10行进行放置，每行为96个时隙，对应大颗粒通道带宽为1Gbps。假如在通道带宽减小时需要从10Gbps降低为5Gbps，则需要删除5行。假如，知道了前5行为保留的时隙，后5行为待整理的时隙，开始：
1)Pointer A(pointer A为第一指针)和point B(pointer B为第二指针)同时开始查找，其中，Pointer A用于在前5行查找空闲子时隙，Pointer B用于在后5行查找被占用子时隙；
2)当Point A找到空闲子时隙后，停止查找，等待pointer B找到被占用子时隙(被占用子时隙也可以称为待挪动子时隙)；
3)Pointer B找到被占用子时隙，立刻将pointer B指示的子时隙对应客户挪动到pointer A指示的子时隙；
4)挪动完毕后，二者重复1)～3)的步骤，以使从行首到行尾，从第一行移动到第二行，直至将后5行中被占用的子时隙对应的客户均移动至前5行中的子时隙。
在一种可能地实施方式中，可以在发送的第一请求消息或第二请求消息中携带用于指示调整Q1个客户与子时隙的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息。比如，可以在用于承载开销信息的码块上的标识字段(flag字段)后的2bit保留位字段(RES字段)中进行指明采用的调整策略(或称为搬移方式)，比如：
保留(RES)字段为00：可以表示调整策略为前述调整策略B3(调整策略B3可以称为空闲时隙插入搬移)；
保留(RES)字段为01：可以表示调整策略为前述调整策略B2中的增量算法增加；
保留(RES)字段为10：可以表示调整策略为前述调整策略B2中的全量算法；
保留(RES)字段为11：保留。
基于上述内容，在一种可能地实施方式中，网管装置根据客户业务需求，可以下发大颗粒业务带宽调整的信息。比如，当承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒时隙带宽需要增大时，网管装置下发大颗粒业务带宽增大调整信息。在承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒带宽增大后，小颗粒管道总带宽需要进行增大。在小颗粒管道总带宽增大后，网管装置可以根据小颗粒业务需求下发小颗粒业务带宽调整信息(小颗粒管道的带宽调整，也即是单个业务所分配的管道带宽增大)，比如将现有小颗粒业务对应的小颗粒管道带宽增大，或者新增其他的小颗粒业务。
在承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道带宽需要降低时，网管装置在下发对应大颗粒带宽调整信息之前，会先下发小颗粒业务带宽调整。在小颗粒业务带宽调整完毕之后，且小颗粒管道总带宽对应时隙进行整理到待保留时隙中后，网管装置下发大颗粒管道带宽减小信息。
也就是说，网管装置只需要分别下发大颗粒带宽调整信息和小颗粒带宽调整信息，不需要感知小颗粒管道总带宽变化的过程。
另一方面，本申请实施例提供的方案中可以对复帧包括的基本帧的数量，或者说是时隙的数量进行调整，当应用于小颗粒业务时，可以对用于承载小颗粒也的管道带宽进行调整，支持业务管道的按需升级，同时可以不影响客户业务，且可以支持大颗粒管道和小颗粒管道联动调整。当用于承载小颗粒业务的大颗粒管道的数量增多时，通过将多个大颗粒管道融合为一个大颗粒管道，可以最大化提高小颗粒管道的业务承载效率，不会造成较大的带宽浪费，且本申请实施例提供的方案在对带宽的调整过程中，业务不感知，且由于对子时隙和客户的对应关系进行了调整，因此不会造成业务的损伤。可以看出，本申请实施例中可以使得大小颗粒可以同时无损地进行调整，较为简单实用，可以支撑业务的平滑升级。
本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有特别说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个 对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如，第一请求消息和第二请求消息，只是为了区分不同的请求消息，而并不是表示这两个请求消息的优先级或者重要程度等的不同。
需要说明的是，上述各个消息的名称仅仅是作为示例，随着通信技术的演变，上述任意消息均可能改变其名称，但不管其名称如何发生变化，只要其含义与本申请上述消息的含义相同，则均落入本申请的保护范围之内。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，上述实现各网元为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本发明能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
根据前述方法，图8为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图，如图8所示，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备或第二通信设备。该通信设备可以为网络设备，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于网络设备的芯片或电路。
该通信装置1301包括处理器1302和收发器1303。
进一步的，该通信装置1301可以包括有存储器1304。图中存储器1304为虚线是进一步标识存储器为可选地意思。
进一步的，该通信装置1301还可以进一步包括总线系统，其中，处理器1302、存储器1304、收发器1303可以通过总线系统相连。
应理解，上述处理器1302可以是一个芯片。例如，该处理器1302可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。
在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器1302中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器1302中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器1304，处理器1302读取存储器1304中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
应注意，本申请实施例中的处理器1302可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。 结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器1304可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
该通信装置1301对应上述方法中的第一通信设备的情况下，收发器1303可以用于发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。处理器1302可以用于根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列；Q1为正整数，发送第二码块序列。
该通信装置1301对应上述方法中的第二通信设备的情况下，收发器1303可以用于接收第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。处理器1302可以用于获取第二码块序列；根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对第二码块序列解复用，得到Q1个第一码块序列；S1和Q1均为正整数。
该通信装置所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
根据前述方法，图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图，如图9所示，通信装置1401可以包括通信接口1403和处理器1402。进一步的，该通信装置1401可以包括有存储器1404。图中存储器1404为虚线是进一步标识存储器为可选地意思。通信接口1403，用于输入和/或输出信息；处理器1402运行时可以使得通信装置1401实现上述图1a至图7的相关方案中第一通信设备侧的方法，或使得通信装置1401实现上述图1a至图7的相关方案中第二通信设备侧的方法。本申请实施例中，通信接口1403可以实现上述图8的收发器1303所实现的方案，处理器1402可以实现上述图8的处理器1302所实现的方案，存储器1404可以实现上述图8的存储器1304所实现的方案，在此不再赘述。
基于以上实施例以及相同构思，图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意图，如图10所示，该通信装置1501可以为第一通信设备或第二通信设备，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于第一通信设备或第二通信设备的芯片或电路。该通信装置1501包括处理单 元1502和通信单元1503。进一步的，该通信装置1501可以包括有存储单元1504，也可以不包括存储单元1504。图中存储单元1504为虚线是进一步标识存储器为可选地意思。
该通信装置可以对应上述方法中的第一通信设备。通过通信单元1503发送第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。处理单元1502用于根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到第二码块序列；Q1为正整数；通过通信单元1503发送第二码块序列。
该通信装置可以对应上述方法中的第二通信设备。通过通信单元1503接收第一请求消息，第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。处理单元1502用于获取第二码块序列；根据第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对第二码块序列解复用，得到Q1个第一码块序列；S1和Q1均为正整数。
其中，处理单元1502可以是处理器或控制器，例如可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，通用处理器，数字信号处理(digital signal processing，DSP)，专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuits，ASIC)，现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包括一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。存储单元1504可以是存储器。通信单元1503是一种该装置的接口电路，用于从其它装置接收信号。例如，当该装置以芯片的方式实现时，该通信单元1503是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路，或者，是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。
该通信装置1501可以为上述任一实施例中的第一通信设备或第二通信设备。例如，当通信装置1501为第一通信设备或第二通信设备时，该处理单元1502例如可以是处理器，该通信单元1503例如可以是收发器。可选的，该收发器可以包括射频电路，该存储单元例如可以是存储器。例如，当通信装置1501为用于进行小区搜索的芯片时，该处理单元1502例如可以是处理器，该通信单元1503例如可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。该处理单元1502可执行存储单元存储的计算机执行指令，可选地，该存储单元为该芯片内的存储单元，如寄存器、缓存等，该存储单元还可以是该会话管理网元内的位于该芯片外部的存储单元，如只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)等。
该通信装置所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
可以理解的是，上述通信装置1501中各个单元的功能可以参考相应方法实施例的实现，此处不再赘述。
应理解，以上通信装置的单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分，实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上，也可以物理上分开。本申请实施例中，通信单元1503可以由上述图8的收发器1303实现，处理单元1502可以由上述图8的处理器1302实现。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码或指令，当该计算机程序代码或指令在计算机上运行时，使得该 计算机执行图1a至图7所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图1a至图7所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统可以包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行图1a至图7所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。可选地，该芯片系统还包括存储器。存储器，用于存储计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)。处理器，用于从存储器调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有芯片系统的设备执行图1a至图7所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种系统，其包括前述的一个或多个第一通信设备以及一个或多个第二通信设备。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disc，SSD))等。
需要指出的是，本专利申请文件的一部分包含受著作权保护的内容。除了对专利局的专利文件或记录的专利文档内容制作副本以外，著作权人保留著作权。
上述各个装置实施例中第二通信设备与第一通信设备和方法实施例中的第二通信设备或第一通信设备对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤，除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如，部件可以是但不限于，在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示，在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中，部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外，这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据，例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬 件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (29)

  1. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括通信接口和处理器：
    通信接口，用于发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；
    处理器，用于根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，对所述S1个时隙资源中时隙资源对应的Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到所述第二码块序列；所述Q1为正整数；通过通信接口发送所述第二码块序列，所述S1和所述Q1均为正整数。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，所述S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；
    所述处理器，还用于：
    根据所述调整后复帧中的S1个子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，将所述第二码块序列和所述第三码块序列复用，得到第四码块序列；
    通过通信接口发送所述第四码块序列。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，所述通信接口，还用于：
    发送第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述第二请求消息中还包括：
    用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息；
    其中，所述调整策略包括：
    根据第一预设规则建立所述Q1个客户中的客户与所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系；其中，一个客户对应至少一个时隙资源，一个时隙资源对应一个或零个客户；或，
    在所述第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；
    其中，所述待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且所述时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；
    所述待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。
  5. 如权利要求1或2所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述通信接口，具体用于：
    发送R1个第一子请求消息；其中，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；所述Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，所述R1为正整数；所述R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据所述R1个第一子请求消息指示的所述S1个时隙资源的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：
    用于指示所述第一子请求消息是否为所述R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。
  7. 如权利要求1-6任一项所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述第一请求消息承载于：所述第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。
  8. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述通信接口，还用于：
    接收第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示允许所述第一请求消息请求的内容；
    发送第一确认消息，所述第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用所述第一请求消息所请求的内容。
  9. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括处理器和通信接口；
    通信接口，用于接收第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；
    处理器，用于获取第二码块序列；根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及所述S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对所述第二码块序列解复用，得到所述Q1个第一码块序列；所述S1和所述Q1均为正整数，所述S1和所述Q1均为正整数。
  10. 如权利要求9所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，所述S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；
    所述通信接口，还用于：
    接收第四码块序列；
    所述处理器，具体用于：
    根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧中S1个子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对所述第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列。
  11. 如权利要求9或10所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，所述通信接口，还用于：
    接收第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
  12. 如权利要求11所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述第二请求消息中还包括：
    用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息；
    其中，所述调整策略包括：
    根据第一预设规则建立所述Q1个客户中的客户与所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系；其中，一个客户对应至少一个时隙资源，一个时隙资源对应一个或零个客户；或，
    在所述第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；
    其中，所述待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且所述时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；
    所述待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。
  13. 如权利要求9或10所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述通信接口，具体用于：
    接收R1个第一子请求消息；其中，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；所述Q1个第一码块序列与所述Q1个客户一一对应，所述R1为正整数；所述R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据所述R1个第一子请求消息指示的所述S1个时隙资源的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息还包括：
    用于指示所述第一子请求消息是否为所述R1个第一子请求消息中的最后一个的指示信息。
  15. 如权利要求9-14任一项所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述第一请求消息承载于：所述第二码块序列中的复帧中的用于承载开销信息的码块。
  16. 如权利要求9-15任一项所述的通信设备，其特征在于，所述通信接口，还用于：
    发送第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示允许所述第一请求消息请求的内容；
    接收第一确认消息，所述第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用所述第一请求消息所请求的内容。
  17. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；
    根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，对所述S1个时隙资源中时隙资源对应的Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到所述第二码块序列；所述Q1为正整数；
    发送所述第二码块序列。
  18. 如权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，所述S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；
    所述发送第二码块序列，包括：
    根据所述调整后复帧中的S1个子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，将所述第二码块序列和所述第三码块序列复用，得到第四码块序列；
    发送所述第四码块序列。
  19. 如权利要求17或18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，所述根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及所述S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，将所述Q1个第一码块序列复用，得到所述第二码块序列之前，还包括：
    发送第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二请求消息中还包括：
    用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息；
    其中，所述调整策略包括：
    根据第一预设规则建立所述Q1个客户中的客户与所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系；其中，一个客户对应至少一个时隙资源，一个时隙资源对应一个或零个客户； 或，
    在所述第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；
    其中，所述待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且所述时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；
    所述待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。
  21. 如权利要求17或18所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一请求消息还用于指示更新客户与时隙资源的对应关系的情况下：
    所述发送第一请求消息包括：
    发送R1个第一子请求消息；其中，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；所述Q1个第一码块序列与所述Q1个客户一一对应，所述R1为正整数；所述R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
  22. 如权利要求17-21任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发送第一请求消息之后，还包括：
    接收第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示允许所述第一请求消息请求的内容；
    发送第一确认消息，所述第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用所述第一请求消息所请求的内容。
  23. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一请求消息，所述第一请求消息用于请求调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量；
    获取第二码块序列；
    根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧对应的S1个时隙资源，以及所述S1个时隙资源中时隙资源与Q1个第一码块序列的对应关系，对所述第二码块序列解复用，得到所述Q1个第一码块序列；所述S1和所述Q1均为正整数。
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述S1个时隙资源为S1个子时隙，所述S1个子时隙中的一个子时隙为对一个时隙划分得到的至少两个子时隙中的一个；
    所述获取第二码块序列，包括：
    接收第四码块序列；
    根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧中S1个子时隙对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对所述第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列。
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述Q1个第一码块序列与Q1个客户一一对应，所述根据所述第二码块序列中调整后复帧中时隙资源对应的时隙，以及第三码块序列对应的时隙，对所述第四码块序列解复用，得到第二码块序列和第三码块序列之前，还包括：
    接收第二请求消息，所述第二请求消息用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系。
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二请求消息中还包括：
    用于指示调整所述Q1个客户与时隙资源的对应关系的调整策略的指示信息；
    其中，所述调整策略包括：
    根据第一预设规则建立所述Q1个客户中的客户与所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源的对应关系；其中，一个客户对应至少一个时隙资源，一个时隙资源对应一个或零个客户；或，
    在所述第一请求消息用于请求减小第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量的情况下：根据第二预设规则建立待删除时隙资源中被占用时隙资源对应的客户与待保留时隙资源中的空闲时隙资源的对应关系；
    其中，所述待删除时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且所述时隙资源并非调整后复帧对应的时隙资源；
    所述待保留时隙资源中的时隙资源满足条件：所述时隙资源为调整前复帧对应的时隙资源，且为调整后复帧对应的时隙资源。
  27. 如权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一请求消息还用于指示更新客户与时隙资源的对应关系的情况下：
    所述接收第一请求消息包括：
    接收R1个第一子请求消息；其中，所述R1个第一子请求消息中的一个第一子请求消息用于指示：调整后的复帧中对应的所述S1个时隙资源中的时隙资源与Q1个客户中的客户的对应关系；所述Q1个第一码块序列与所述Q1个客户一一对应，所述R1为正整数；所述R1个第一子请求消息还用于指示根据所述R1个第一子请求消息指示的所述S1个时隙资源的数量调整第二码块序列包括的复帧中的基本帧数量。
  28. 如权利要求23-27任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述接收第一请求消息之后，还包括：
    发送第一响应消息，所述第一响应消息用于指示允许所述第一请求消息请求的内容；
    接收第一确认消息，所述第一确认消息用于指示以第一预设码块为起始，启用所述第一请求消息所请求的内容。
  29. 一种芯片系统，其特征在于，包括通信接口和处理器，所述通信接口，用于输入和/或输出信息；当所述处理器运行时，使得权利要求17至28任一项所述的方法被执行。
PCT/CN2021/135835 2021-02-10 2021-12-06 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统 WO2022170830A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21925477.8A EP4283888A1 (en) 2021-02-10 2021-12-06 Communication method, device, and chip system
US18/446,884 US20230388984A1 (en) 2021-02-10 2023-08-09 Communication Method and Device, and Chip System

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110185075.1A CN114915366A (zh) 2021-02-10 2021-02-10 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统
CN202110185075.1 2021-02-10

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/446,884 Continuation US20230388984A1 (en) 2021-02-10 2023-08-09 Communication Method and Device, and Chip System

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022170830A1 true WO2022170830A1 (zh) 2022-08-18

Family

ID=82761738

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/135835 WO2022170830A1 (zh) 2021-02-10 2021-12-06 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230388984A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4283888A1 (zh)
CN (1) CN114915366A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022170830A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116346296A (zh) * 2021-12-24 2023-06-27 华为技术有限公司 一种灵活以太网FlexE中小颗粒业务的时隙协商及装置
CN115941494A (zh) * 2022-12-29 2023-04-07 苏州盛科通信股份有限公司 一种细粒度切片时隙协商的方法及应用

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108632061A (zh) * 2017-03-20 2018-10-09 华为技术有限公司 一种带宽调整方法及装置
CN109995455A (zh) * 2017-12-29 2019-07-09 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法、通信设备及存储介质
CN112312483A (zh) * 2019-08-01 2021-02-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 带宽增加、带宽减少方法及装置、存储介质、电子装置

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108632061A (zh) * 2017-03-20 2018-10-09 华为技术有限公司 一种带宽调整方法及装置
CN109995455A (zh) * 2017-12-29 2019-07-09 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法、通信设备及存储介质
CN112312483A (zh) * 2019-08-01 2021-02-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 带宽增加、带宽减少方法及装置、存储介质、电子装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114915366A (zh) 2022-08-16
EP4283888A1 (en) 2023-11-29
US20230388984A1 (en) 2023-11-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3787208B1 (en) Data transmission method and a communication system
CN113300810B (zh) 一种传输速率的调整方法及网络设备
WO2022170830A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统
WO2018090856A1 (zh) 用于建立灵活以太网群组的方法和设备
JP2023535750A (ja) データ伝送方法及びデバイス
US20230035379A1 (en) Service flow adjustment method and communication apparatus
CN113330696A (zh) Cpri数据块传输方法和设备
WO2022183875A1 (zh) 确定传输时隙的方法和相关装置
US20230209517A1 (en) Resource Configuration Method and Communication Apparatus
WO2023109424A1 (zh) 一种数据传输的方法以及相关装置
WO2021115215A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法、通信设备及存储介质
WO2021218721A1 (zh) 业务处理的方法和装置
JP7167345B2 (ja) データ伝送方法、通信機器、および記憶媒体
EP2798790B1 (en) Compression method for tdm frames in a packet network
WO2022170812A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、设备和芯片系统
WO2020029892A1 (zh) 接收码块流的方法、发送码块流的方法和通信装置
WO2023124551A1 (zh) 分组信号的发送方法、装置、存储介质以及电子装置
WO2024045869A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法和数据传输装置
US20210160346A1 (en) Method for Receiving Code Block Stream, Method for Sending Code Block Stream, and Communications Apparatus
CN113824525A (zh) 资源配置方法、装置及可读存储介质
CN117579220A (zh) 一种故障码块处理方法及装置
CN117692114A (zh) 一种传输数据的方法和装置
CN117354159A (zh) 切片方法、业务处理方法、通信节点及存储介质
CN117201968A (zh) 业务数据处理的方法和装置
CN118055076A (zh) 一种报文处理方法、信息处理方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21925477

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021925477

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230821

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE